Canon VK-16 v2.0, VB-C500VD, VB-C300, VK-64 v2.0, VB-C50FSi, VB-C60, VB-C500D, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR User manual

Canon VK-16 v2.0, VB-C500VD, VB-C300, VK-64 v2.0, VB-C50FSi, VB-C60, VB-C500D, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR User manual
Network Camera Recording and Monitoring System
Network Video Recorder
VK-64/VK-16
Y
P
O
C
Administrator's Manual
Ver. 2.0
1.3
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing Network Video Recorder VK-64 v2.0 (hereafter referred to as
“VK-64”). VK-64 is a network video recording and monitoring system and consists of the
Storage Server and Viewer. Please read this manual prior to operation. This manual also
explains how to use the Network Video Recorder VK-16 v2.0 (hereafter referred to as
“VK-16”), VK-Lite v2.0 (hereafter referred to as “VK-Lite”), and Viewer-Only use. See P. 18
for the difference between the VK-64 and VK-16. See P. 41 for the difference between VK64/VK-16 and VK-Lite. See P. 161 for the functions not available in the Viewer Only mode.
*VK-16 and VK-Lite have the same functionality as VK-64 outlined in this manual, unless explicitly
indicated otherwise.
Request to Customers
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Canon owns the copyright of this manual. The unauthorized transfer of all or any part of the
contents of this Manual is forbidden.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without any notice.
All possible measures have been taken to ensure that the contents of this manual are
accurate. If you find any errors, omissions or other faults, please contact your vendor.
Irrespective of items (2) and (3) above, Canon cannot bear responsibility for any effects
resulting from operation.
When procedures that involve using the control panel are described in this manual, the
operations are described as shown in Windows Vista Basic.
Y
P
O
C
Request to Customers (Indemnity)
Malfunction and failure of the software, or other factors may cause problems, such as recording
failure, recorded data corruption or loss. Canon shall have no liability whatsoever for any loss or
damages incurred by the user as a result of such problems.
Support Information
For various types of information relating to support, including updated product software (patch installer),
User’s Manual, operating environment, etc., please refer to Canon Web site.
Copyright Information
Videos, images or sounds recorded with your camera may not be utilized or published, without consent of
copyright holders, if any, except in such a way as permitted for personal use under the relevant copyright law.
Trademark Notice
Canon and the Canon logo are registered trademarks of Canon Inc.
Microsoft Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows is legally recognized as Microsoft Windows Operating System.
QuickTime is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Apache is a trademark of the Apache Software Foundation.
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
All other company or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
Icons Used in this Manual
Note
Tip
Important information that must be observed or actions that are
prohibited during an operation. These notes must be read to prevent
possible faults or errors during operation.
Supplementary information or a reference to an operation. Users are
recommeded to read these memos.
Storage Server includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (www.apache.org). Apache software is protected by the copyright
law (Copyright(c) 2000-2003 Apache Software Foundation). For the license terms associated with this software, please refer to the file
APACHE_LICENSE in the LICENSE folder, in the installation directory.
2
Introduction
MPEG-4
NOTICE ABOUT THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD: THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL
STANDARD ("MPEG-4 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A
CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING
THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND ADDITIONAL
LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding
MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a
personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to
provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.”
Y
P
O
C
Third Party's Software
This product contains third party's software modules. For the license conditions, please refer to the
LICENSE folder on the supplied CD-ROM.
Software
Apache
FastCGI
Expat
License
License Agreement
Apache Software License, Version 2.0
Apache
Open Market License
FastCGI
MIT License
Expat
3
Purpose of This Manual
This manual is written for the System Administrator installng and operating the VK-64/VK16 system.
It explains the functions of VK-64/VK-16 and introduces more appropriate system
deployment methods. Use this manual as a reference when making a backup of data or
troubleshooting a problem.
Y
P
O
C
4
Contents
Introduction
Purpose of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
About Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Before Starting Operations <Important> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Chapter 1 System Overview
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Preparation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
System Operation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
VK-64/VK-16 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Y
P
O
C
Communication Mechanism of VK-64/VK-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Typical System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Supported Camera Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Firmware Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Notes on Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
System Design Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
System Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
When using multiple Storage Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
When using Viewer alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Server Sizing Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Approximate Video Data Volume per Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Required Hard Disk Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Sensor Event Recording and Motion Detection Recording Concept . . . . . .35
Storage Server Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Notes on Viewer Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Network Bandwidth Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
VK-Lite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Specification Comparison of VK-64/VK-16 and VK-Lite . . . . . . .41
Chapter 2 Installation
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Start up the Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Upgrade from Version 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Preparation and Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Chapter 3 Storage Server Configuration Reference
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
5
Contents
Storage Server Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
How to Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Set the Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
How to Display the Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
How to set the Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Logon As Service Privilege . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Disk Space Management <Important> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Disk Space Management Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Handling at Each Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Low Disk Space Warning Level Calculation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Threshold Level Calculation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Limit Level Calculation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Calculation Example for Each Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Y
P
O
C
Set Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
How to Display the Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
How to Set the Events Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Set the Event Notification Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
How to Display the Event Notification Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
How to Set the Event Notification Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Set User Management Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
How to Display the User Management Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Administrator and Operator Status User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
How to Set the User Management Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Change User to Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Delete a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Request User Authentication at Tool Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Chapter 4 Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Launch VK Viewer and Display the Configuration and
Preferences Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
How to Launch VK-64/VK-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
How to Start VK-Lite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Launch by Connecting to the Localhost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Launch Storage Server by Specifying the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Access to the Configuration and Preferences screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Storage and Camera Server Summary windows . . . . . . . . . .82
Display the Storage and Camera Server Summary Windows . . . . . . . . . . .82
Storage Servers and Locations/Zones options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Other Functions in Both Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Location and Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Add a Location and Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Edit a Location and Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Delete a Location and Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
6
Contents
Add Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Display Storage and Camera Server Summary Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Add Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Edit Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Delete Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Register Camera Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Register Camera Server (by Search) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Edit Camera Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Delete Camera Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Overview of Recording Schedules Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Recording Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Set Normal Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Y
P
O
C
Create Normal Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Change Camera Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Batch-Setting Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Set Continuous Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Set Motion Detection Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Set Motion Detection Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Edit Motion Detection Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Set Sensor Event Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Set Sensor Event Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Edit Sensor Event Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Set Preset Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Set Preset Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Set a Special Day Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Special Day Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Add, Edit and Delete a Schedule Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Add and Delete a Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Display Recording Setting Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Check Summary Information of a Recording Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Check Summary Information of Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Chapter 5 Viewer Reference
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Viewer Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Start the Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
How to Launch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Launch by Connecting to the localhost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Launch Storage Server by Specifying the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Launch without Storage Server (Viewer Only Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Functions not Available in Viewer Only Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Viewer Start-up Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Viewer Start-up Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Menu Bar of Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Function of Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
7
Contents
Viewer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Viewer Settings window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Set the Tab for Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Set whether to select the Master Storage Server
when the Viewer starts up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Set layout of the Viewer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Set Event Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Set Event Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Set the Tab for Guest User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Set the Frame Rate during live viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Audio Transmission Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Focus Operation Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Proxy Server Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Superimpose the Date and Time on Still Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Save Viewer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Y
P
O
C
Arrange and Save Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Manage Video Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Layout menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Organize Layouts and Layout Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Save a Layout or Layout Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Arrange Layout Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Alignment Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Custom Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Hide and Show Task Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Basic Video Window Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Select Cameras for Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Camera Selection Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Camera Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Locations and the Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Basic Video Window Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Create, scale and move Video Windows
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Arrange Video Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Select Multiple Video Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Video Window States
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Video Window Properties: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Video Window states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Pan, Tilt and Zoom Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Other Video Window Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Change the Video Window size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Change the Received Video size (VB-C60, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR,
VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Enable Exposure Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Other Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Viewer Shade Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Audio Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
8
Contents
Use Timeline and View Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Timeline Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Monitor Live Video in relation to the Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Use the Timeline to play and extract video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
One-minute a manual recording (Record Now) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Shoot a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Daylight Savings Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Extract video to save to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
View and Search Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Live Events Log list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Display the Live Event Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Overview of Alert Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Search Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Select Criteria for Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
View retrieved recorded video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Y
P
O
C
Popup Video upon Event Occuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Chapter 6 Operation and Management
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Health Check for Storage Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
VK Events (Timeline for VK Viewer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Number of Frames Queued for Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Operation Guideline for Recording and Viewing . . . . . . . . .223
Live-View Frame Rate Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Recording Frame Rate Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Operational Guideline for Sensor Event Recording . . . . . . .225
Proper Operation of Sensor Event Recording (Optimization of Sensor
Arrangement and Sensitivity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Optimization of Motion Detection Recording (Index) . . . . . .226
Chapter 7 Backup Scheme
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Backup Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Backup Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Restore Server for Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Files to Make a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Storage Location of Video Data, Audio Data, and Event Data . . . . . . . . . .231
Backup for Data Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
About Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Backup for Archiving (Long-Term Storage of Data) . . . . . . .235
Backup Procedure for Video Data and Event Data . . . . . . . .236
Restoration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Restore Data from Backup for Data Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Restore Data from Backup for Data Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
9
Contents
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Configuration 1: Backup for Data Protection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Configuration 2: Backup for Data Protection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Configuration 3: Backup for Data Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Configuration 4: Backup from Multiple Storage Servers (Backup for Data
Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Chapter 8 System Maintenance
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Upgrade VK-64/VK-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Reinstall VK-64/VK-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
When You Have the Released Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
When You Do Not Have the Released Version 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Y
P
O
C
Procedure for Restoring Previous Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Required Media and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Camera Server Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Procedure for Updating Camera Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Troubleshooting for Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
VK Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Viewing Screen and Video Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Extract Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Scheduling and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Configuration Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Upgrade Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Operation Messages and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
VK-64/VK-16 Recording Engine Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Access Engine Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
VK-64/VK-16 Viewer Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Log Storage Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
A List of Error Codes in Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
VK Event Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Appendix
Camera Server Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Lifetime of Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
RAID Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
How To Check Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Storage Server Configuration tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
VK Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Functional Limitations on MPEG-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
10
About Manuals
VK-64/VK-16 comes with three manuals including this document.
Setup Guide
A manual that introduces this software.
Be sure to read this manual when using the software for the first time.
Viewer Operation Guide
A simplified manual for the VK Viewer.
Be sure to read the Administrator’s Manual for details.
Administrator’s Manual (this manual - pdf file)
This manual is intended for the System Administrator to install and operating this
software.
Be sure to read this manual to ensure proper system operation.
Y
P
O
C
11
Before Starting Operations <Important>
It is recommended that you perform tests under actual conditions before starting
operations.
This recording software may not operate as your settings in recording or
displaying live video, depending on the capabilities of your PC and the
network environment.
When load on your computer CPU and hard disk is high, the specified frame
rate may not be available, or the video recording may be interrupted or the
Viewer operation may take longer. Also, when available disk space is low,
the disk load may increase and the video recording may be interrupted.
The performance of storage servers and viewers may be negatively affected
on the PC, where anti-virus software or firewall is running.
When using a proxy server (→P. 57, P. 79)
If you use a proxy server, recording frame rate may not be achieved as
specified or live video monitoring may be interrupted. Also, communication
between the Storage Server and Viewer may occasionally be disconnected.
If you are operating using IPSec, the recording and display performance
may be degraded.
Refer to “Notes on Operating Environment” (→P. 24~27) for information on
OS you use.
When recording to a NAS server, it is recommended to separate the
communication networks for the camera and NAS.
Use recommended NAS servers with Windows Storage Server 2003 or
Windows Storage Server 2003 R2.
Although the audio function of the VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50i, VB-C50iR,
and VB-C50FSi can also be used, take note of the following warnings.
• The VK Viewer supports audio transmission and reception.
• Audio data can be recorded. However, audio data cannot be recorded
individually, and must be recorded together with video data.
• Only when playing video, the recorded video (JPEG) is synchronized with
the recorded audio. However, the audio and images may not synchronize
depending on the environment (→P.114).
• The audio stream may be interrupted due to the performance of your PC
and the network environment.
• The audio function is not available via a proxy server.
• Audio may be interrupted on the PC where anti-virus software is running.
The software may not be able to record video, if you use it under the
condition where the IP address of storage servers or camera servers are
occasionally changed. So, please be sure to use fixed IP addresses.
Y
P
O
C
12
Chapter 1
Y
P
O
C
System Overview
Chapter Overview
This chapter provides preliminary information you should know before using the VK-64/VK16 and explains the operating environment and basic concept you need to understand to
design your system.
●
Preparation Flow
●
System Operation Overview
●
Communication Mechanism of VK-64/VK-16
●
Operating Environment
●
Notes on Operating Environment
●
System Design Concept
●
VK-Lite
Explains the flow from setting up the VK-64/VK-16 to starting the operation.
Y
P
O
C
Explains the system operating environment such as the number of Camera Servers
available for the Storage Server, product types, and the number of licenses for each
product.
Explains the communication mechanism of the VK-64/VK-16 with, using a typical system
configuration.
Explains operating environment of the VK-64/VK-16 and points of notice regarding the OS
environment.
Explains about each version of Windows OS.
Explains the concept and points of notice when you design the system.
Explains about functional limitations and the specification comparison between VK-Lite and
VK-64/VK-16.
14
1
System Overview
Y
P
O
C
15
Preparation Flow
The following explains the flow from setting up the VK-64/VK-16 to starting the operation.
1
Set up Camera Servers
The first step is to set up your Camera Servers. Refer
to your Camera Server manuals for connection in
detail.
VB-C60
Camera Servers (➝ P. 22)
Y
P
O
C
VB-C300
2
Install Storage Server and Viewer
The Storage Server and Viewer can be installed on one PC.
The Viewer can be installed on other computers on the
network, and it will access recorded video from the Storage
Server through the network.
Server setting, event notification to users and user privilege
configuration can be set via Storage Server Configuration
dialog.
16
Preparation Flow
4
1
Create and save Viewer Layout
Recorded video from
Storage Server
Y
P
O
C
3
Live video from
Camera Servers
System Overview
Monitoring live video and
playing back recorded events
can be done by the Viewer
application. And also you can
customize the Viewing Area
and save Layouts.
Configure Recording Settings
Register Camera Servers and Storage
Servers and set up recording schedules.
17
System Operation Overview
VK-64/VK-16 Overview
●
Network Video Recorder
●
Composition of Network Video Recorder
●
Product Type
Network Video Recorder is software for viewing video, recording video and audio, and
playing back video from multiple network cameras (hereafter referred to as “Camera
Servers”). This supports viewing and recording JPEG and MPEG-4 video, bidirectional
audio communication, and recording audio.
Network Video Recorder consists of two software component: a Storage Server and a
Viewer.
The Storage Server can record video from multiple Camera Servers, and can also record
event information from motion detection and external device inputs. The Viewers can
show the live video from multiple Camera Servers, and playback video recordings saved
on a Storage Server.
Y
P
O
C
Number of Camera Servers Used
Product Name
Storage Server
Viewer
Network Video Recorder VK-64 v2.0
1 license
1 license
Network Video Recorder VK-16 v2.0
1 license
1 license
Network Video Recorder VK-64 v2.0 Viewer
-
1 license
Network Video Recorder VK-64 v2.0 5 Viewers
-
5 licenses
●
Network Video Recorder VK-64
●
Network Video Recorder VK-16
Network Video Recorder VK-64 (hereafter referred to as “VK-64”) can register and use
up to a maximum of 64 Camera Servers.
Network Video Recorder VK-16 (hereafter referred to as “VK-16”) has the same basic
functionality as VK-64, but is only able to register up to 16 Camera Servers.
A comparison between VK-64 and VK-16 is as follows.
Type
Storage Server
VK-64
Maximum number of registered Camera Servers: 64 units
VK-16
Maximum number of registered Camera Servers: 16 units
All other functions are the same as the VK-64
* The Viewer for VK-64 and VK-16 is the same.
18
Viewer
Same
System Operation Overview
●
VK-64 Viewer (Using the Viewer Only)
●
Upgrading from a Previous Version
●
Network Video Recorder VK-Lite
1
System Overview
If you want to use additional Viewers, purchase the required number of viewer license. If
you do not need to record video, the Viewer can be used in a standalone configuration.
You can perform live viewing and camera control of up to 64 units (cannot use functions
such as recording and playback, display event information from motion detection and
external device inputs, or still frames).
To upgrade from an older version (v1.1, v1.2, v1.3, or v1.4) to v2.0, download the free
patch install from our website. License keys from older versions can also be valid in v2.0.
Y
P
O
C
The Network Video Recorder VK-Lite (hereafter referred to as “VK-Lite”) which is
bundled with the VB-C60 is a simplified version of VK-64/VK-16. VK-Lite can display
video, record video and audio, and playback for up to 4 Camera Servers.
19
Communication Mechanism of VK-64/VK-16
The following explains the communication mechanism of the VK-64/VK-16, with using a
typical system configuration.
Typical System Configuration
VK-64/VK-16 provides video viewing and recording from Camera Servers via an IP
network such as a LAN. Since VK-64/VK-16 makes use of IP networks, cameras can be
installed easily. And also addition of new camera or change of camera location can be
done flexibly.
Y
P
O
C
VB-C60
VB150
Pl
ay
ba
ck
VC-C50iR
Li
ve
VC-C50i
Live
VB-C300
Live
Monitor
ba
ay
Pl
VB-C50FSi
Li
ve
ck
VB-C50i
Playback
VB-C50iR
Monitor
View live and recorded video
Viewer
Operator Capabilities:
Viewing Live Video Viewing Events Viewing recorded video
20
Communication Mechanism of VK-64/VK-16
1
■ Application Types and Functions
Function
Storage Server
Save logs information of such as video, audio, and
events.
Viewer
Record
Playback
Receive and
record video.
Play back
recorded video
by Viewer.
System Overview
Application
User can view recorded information, monitor live-video
and check and search events from recording server.
Administrator can configure the strage server setting.
Y
P
O
C
Record video to the Storage Server #1
Server
Administrator Capabilities:
Configuring Storage Server Configuring Event Notification
Configuring Users
Display live and recorded video
Viewer
Administrator Capabilities:
Configure recording settings Configure event alerts
Viewing Live Video Viewing Events Viewing recorded video
Configuring Camera Servers Configuring Storage Server
Playback
Record
Monitor
Record video to the
Storage Server #2
Storage Server
21
Operating Environment
Supported Camera Servers
The table below shows the Camera Servers supported by VK-64/VK-16.
This information is as of September 2008. For the latest information, please access
to Canon Web site.
Camera Server
VB-C60
VB-C300
VB-C50i
Ver. 1.0 0
Y
P
O
C
Ver. 1.0 Rev. 02 or later
Ver. 1.1 Rev. 0 or later
VB-C50iR
VB-C50FSi
VB-C50FSi
VB-C10
Note
Ver. 1.2 Rev. 77 or later
Ver. 1.0 Rev. 77 or later
Ver. 1.0 Rev. 77 or later
VB-C10R
VB150
Firmware Versions
Ver. 1.0 Rev. 27 or later
Ver. 1.1 Rev. 42 or later
If using VB150 with multiple cameras, there are restrictions on
frame rate.
Refer to your VB150 User’s Manual for details (➝ P. 36).
This version of the Storage Server and Viewer do not support
IPv6. Operate VB-C60 using IPv4.
The VB-C10, VB-C10R, and VB150 are not supported by VKLite.
Firmware Upgrade
The latest firmware information can be found on Canon Web site.
22
Operating Environment
System Environment
1
System Overview
This information is as of September 2008. For the latest information, please access
to Canon Web site.
Viewer
Minimum Configuration
CPU
Pentium 4 2.2GHz or faster (Pentium4 3.4GHz or higher when using MPEG-4)
Operating System
Windows XP Professional (SP2, SP3)
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (SP2)
Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition (SP2)
Windows Vista Business/Enterprise/Ultimate (SP1)
Memory
Hard Disk
Display
Sound
Y
P
O
C
1GB or more
2GB or more
1024 x 768 or higher resolution for the effective display area
Color display of 16 bits or more
A high performance video card is recommended. In case of using PCI video
cards, display performance may be reduced.
Audio playback support is necessary for event notification alert sounds (➝ P. 168).
* VK-Lite also supports Windows Vista Home Premium.
* Only 32-bit Edition of Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are supported.
* 32-bit Edition/64-bit Edition of Windows Vista are supported.
Storage Server
Minimum Configuration
CPU
Operating System
Pentium 4 2.2GHz or faster (Pentium4 3.4GHz or higher when using MPEG-4)
Windows XP Professional (SP2, SP3)
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (SP2)
Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition (SP2)
Windows Vista Business/Enterprise/Ultimate (SP1)
Memory
1GB RAM or more
For using more than 48 Camera Servers, 1.5GB or more required.
Hard Disk
20GB HDD or more, SCSI or IDE, NTFS formatted
* The requirements for Storage Server will vary due to the operating environment (number of Camera
Servers, setting of recording frame rate etc.). It is also dependent on pre-event recording settings.
Please contact dealers that handle Canon products for further information.
* VK-Lite also supports Windows Vista Home Premium.
* Only 32-bit Edition of Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are supported.
* 32-bit Edition/64-bit Edition of Windows Vista is supported.
23
Notes on Operating Environment
Windows XP
If your Storage Server is installed to the PC on Windows XP SP2 or SP3 and your viewer
is installed to another PC, it is necessary to change your Windows firewall settings for
Windows XP SP2 or SP3.
* The following setting is not required if you install the Storage Server and Viewer on the
same PC.
After installation of the Storage Server:
1. Click Control Panel from the Windows Start menu to launch the Control Panel.
2. In Control Panel, select Windows Firewall. If Windows Firewall is not shown, select
Security Center and then select Windows Firewall.
Y
P
O
C
3. When the Windows Firewall dialog is shown, select the Exception tab and then click
Add Port.
4. In the Add a Port dialog, enter a name for the Storage Server, e.g., “VK-64/VK-16
Storage Server”. And then enter the Port number as “80”. Make sure the TCP protocol
is selected and click OK.
5. In the Windows Firewall dialog, your additional Storage Server is now listed. Make
sure the check box is marked. Click OK to close the dialog.
Setting is now complete.
If more than ten Camera Servers out of all registered ones cannot be connected to
Storage Servers, recording operations may take longer.
24
Notes on Operating Environment
Windows Server 2003
1
System Overview
The default setting of security level of Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition (SP2) and
Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition (SP2) for the Internet or intranet sites in
Internet Explorer is “High”.
Therefore, windows such as the settings window do not function normally unless you first
register the site in the contents block dialog box that appears when you access the
camera’s top page. Register the site to ensure normal functioning.
1. When you access the Camera Server top
page etc. in Internet Explorer, the dialog box
shown at right appears.
Y
P
O
C
2. Click Add, and then the dialog box for adding
Trusted sites appears.
3. Ensure the IP address of your camera server displayed in the Add this Web site to the
zone box and then click Add to register the camera as a trusted site.
For more information on registration to the trusted sites, click Learn more about
Internet Explorer’s Enhanced Security Configuration in the dialog box shown in
step 1 and refer to the summary provided.
Settings are now complete.
25
Notes on Operating Environment
Windows Vista
When using VK-64/VK-16 on Windows Vista Business/Enterprise/Ultimate, pay attention to
the following restrictions:
●
Upgrade your PC
Please note that before upgrading your PC to Windows Vista, you need to upgrade this
software to v2.0, if the version is older than v2.0.
If you upgrade your PC to Windows Vista before upgrading the software to v2.0, you will
not able to complete upgrade installation to v2.0. In this case, follow the procedure below.
Y
P
O
C
1. Right click on the Storage Server Configuration icon on the desktop, then choose
Properties.
2. Click the Compatibility tab and check the Run this program as an administrator
check box.
3. Double click the Storage Server Configuration icon to launch the Storage Server
Configuration tool.
4. Click the Stop Storage Server button in the Storage server status.
5. Click the Retry button on the installer wizard for VK version 2.0.
●
Warning dialog appeared when opening the Storage Server
Configuration dialog
If User Account Control is enabled on Windows Vista, the User Account Control dialog
will appear when you launch the Storage Server Configuration tool.
Click the Continue button to launch the Storage Server Configuration tool.
26
Notes on Operating Environment
●
Storage location of recorded video
●
Shadow backup
1
System Overview
On Windows Vista, snap shots and video files cannot be saved into the Windows folder or
the Program Files folder on the system drive.
You cannot use shadow backup of Windows Vista. So, if once you delete a configuration
file of VK-64/VK-16, you cannot restore the file with shadow backup.(➝ P.233)
Y
P
O
C
27
System Design Concept
System Configuration Example
●
When Viewing and Recording with one PC
Record video to the Storage Server
Storage Server
Display live and recorded video
Viewer
VB-C300
Load on PC may increase depending on the number of camera servers and recording
schedule. Consider your system configuration referring to “Server Sizing Concept”
(➝ P. 31).
●
Y
P
O
C
When Viewing and Recording with one Storage Server and
Multiple Viewers
Receiving and
Recording Video
Storage
Server
Recording Video to
the Storage Server
Storage Server
Receiving Video and
Controlling Camera Server
Viewer
Viewer
Note
28
Displaying Live and Recorded Video
Viewer
Displaying Live and Recorded Video
Viewer
If many Viewers accessing to the same Camera Servers and
Storage Servers simultaneously, it will affect system performance.
Installation of both Storage Server and Viewer on a single PC
may cause a heavy load on your PC depending on the number
of camera servers or recording schedule. If you use VK-64/VK16 with many Camera Servers, install each application on
different PCs. Viewing with a low capacity PC may take longer,
the specified frame rate may not be achieved, recording frame
rate may be lower, or recording may be interrupted (➝P. 31).
System Design Concept
●
When using multiple Storage Servers and Viewers
1
Receiving and
Recording Video
Storage
Server
System Overview
One or more Storage Servers can be used on the same network and Viewer applications
can be configured to play video from more than one Storage Server. For each Viewer,
Master Storage Server (➝ P. 30) needs to be specified for saving information such as
zones and locations of cameras, as well as saving Viewer layouts created by the user.
Recording video to
the Storage Server #1
Master Storage
Server
Y
P
O
C
Receiving video and
controlling camera server
Play back
recorded video
Displying live and recorded events
Viewer
Viewer
Displaying playback video from Storage Server 1
Storage
Server
Viewer
Recording video to
the Storage Server #3
Storage Server
Viewer
Plays back
recorded video
Displaying playback video from
Storage Server #2 and #3
Storage
Server
Receiving and
Recording video
Note
Recording video to the
Storage Server #2
Storage Server
Multiple Storage Server can be
added to one network. Viewers can
receive video for playback from
more than one Storage Server.
You can operate VK-64/VK-16 with up to ten Storage Servers
using any combination of VK-64 Storage Server and VK-16
Storage Server. Up to 192 Camera Servers can be operated.
Up to 10 Viewers can be connected to a Storage Server at the
same time.
If the Storage Server and/or Viewer are installed on multiple
PCs, you need to purchase the necessary license separately
(➝P. 18).
You can not use multiple Storage Servers with VK-Lite.
29
System Design Concept
When using multiple Storage Servers
If multiple Storage Servers are being used, you should specify the Master Storage Server.
A typical multiple Storage Server arrangement is shown below.
Storage Server #2
Master Storage Server
k
bac
Play
Play back Video to Viewer
er
View
o
t
o
Vide
Viewer
Load Camera Server information
Load Zones and Locations
Load Viewer Layouts
Storage Server #3
Play b
ack V
ideo to
Viewe
r
Y
P
O
C
Save Camera Server information
Save Zones and Locations
Save Viewer Layouts
A master storage server is a server, which viewers connect to in the first place. Master
storage servers store information about camera servers, locations, zones and viewer
layouts, which range over multiple storage servers. Viewers extract those information from
a master storage server.
Note
All of the Viewers within a system should use the same
Storage Server as the Master Storage Server. This makes it
possible to use the same Zones, Locations, and Viewer
Layouts in all of the Viewers.
Ensure if the Storage Server and Viewer installed to the PC is
operated with correct daytime setting regularly. We
recommend that you use NTP function to set the time for
Storage Server automatically.
Adjusting the time of Storage Server during recording may
cause problems to the recording video.
When multiple Storage Servers are operated, if the Storage
Servers other than the Master Storage Server are stopped, it
takes time to display the Configuration and Preferences
screen (approximately up to 30 seconds).
When using Viewer alone
The Viewer can be used by itself without connecting to the Storage Server. Although there
are some restrictions on functions such as recording and Event Search, Viewer-Only mode
allows to view live videos.
30
System Design Concept
Server Sizing Concept
1
1) Required hard disk capacity:
System Overview
Determine your server configuration (components and the number of units) depending on
1) required hard disk capacity and 2) video data volume per second.
Consider the required hard disk capacity based on
continuous recording with fixed frame rate, resolution,
and quantity.
2) Video data volume per second: If the video data volume per second by server exceeds
values shown below, you should consider multiple
servers or review the recording conditions.
Note
Y
P
O
C
Every operation environment of VK-64/VK-16 is different (due
to different requirements and different hardware
specifications) and the figures provided below are just for the
reference.
Data volume per drive should be less than 2TB.
Approximate Video Data Volume per Second
The recording performance of VK-64/VK-16 v2.0 is as follows.
For dedicated Storage Server: Maximum amount of recorded data per server = 5.5
MB/sec or less (when using SCSI, SAS disk)
JPEG
MPEG-4
VGA
QVGA
110 fps
360 fps
Total 44Mbit/sec.
For Storage and Playback Server: Maximum amount of recorded data per server = 3
MB/sec or less
JPEG
MPEG-4
Note
VGA
QVGA
60 fps
200 fps
Total 24Mbit/sec.
Data-writing performance may be reduced than the approximate
values given above depending on the hard disk or the RAID card
in the PC.
Required Hard Disk Capacity
The size of the images varies depending on the configuration of the Camera Server (the
settings for Quality and Resolution) and the complexity of the actual image.
31
System Design Concept
●
Determining Required Hard Disk Capacity
Determine the required hard disk capacity as follows.
1
2
3
4
5
Determine the required number of Camera Servers and required video data size.
Select the Image Quality of each Camera Server.
The video quality improves in proportion to the set value, but the data volume also
becomes larger.
Determine the frame rate for recording video (i.e., the number of frames per
second).
For general security purposes, 1 to 2 fps is common. Higher frame rate requires
more hard disk space.
Y
P
O
C
Determine the recording period per day and duration to retain data.
After determining the conditions above, calculate the required hard disk capacity due
to the video data size (in KB). Refer to “Example of frame sizes with VB-C60”,
“Example of frame sizes with VB-C300” and “Example of frame sizes with VB-C50i”
(➝ P. 33).
If you record audio, to calculate the amount of hard disk space required for the audio
data. The data size for recording audio is 8 KB/s regardless of the type of Camera
Server.
When determining hard disk sizes it is important to take into account that there needs to be
considered about 10 to 20% additional room.
6
Example 1: JPEG recording
- Using 16 Camera Servers (VB-C60) for recording,
- With each camera set to Medium Size for video data size and Image Quality set to 50
(data size per 1 frame: 15KB),
- Recording frame rate is set at 2 fps, and
- Data size per second is approximately 30 KB (= 15 KB x 2fps).
Although actual data size depends on objects shot by each Camera Server, this
calculation assumes the typical size shown above.
- Audio recording as also performed simultaneously on 2 of the Camera Servers.
For the above configuration, when JPEG images from 16 camera servers are being
recorded continuously at 2 frames per second all day, every day, the required hard disk
space is approximately 40GB per day (=30KB x 16 cameras x 60 seconds x 60 minutes x
24 hours = 41472000KB per day).
32
System Design Concept
When audio is recorded by 2 camera server, the required hard disk space is approximately
1.3 GB per day (=8 KB x 2 units x 60 seconds x 60 minutes x 24 hours = 1382400 KB).
1
System Overview
Example 2: MPEG-4 recording
- Using 8 Camera Servers (VB-C60) for recording,
- With each camera set to Medium Size (320 x 240) and Video Quality is set to 3,
- Recording frame rate is set at 30 fps, and
- Data size per second is approximately 30 KB.
Although actual data size depends on objects shot by each Camera Server, this
calculation assumes the typical size shown above.
Y
P
O
C
For the above configuration, when MPEG-4 video from 8 Camera Servers are being
recorded continuously at 30 fps all day, every day, the hard disk space required is
approximately 40GB per day (=60KB x 8 cameras x 60 seconds x 60 minutes x 24 hours =
41472000KB per day).
* For the above figures please note that the bandwidth is calculated as 1000Kbps =
1Mbps, and the disk size as 1024KB = 1MB.
The following tables give some typical data sizes per frame (in kilobytes) for various
combination of quality and resolution values referring to a VB-C60, VB-C300 and VB-C50i.
However the actual data size may be different from the data size in the table below
depending on the weather condition and complexity of the image. For example, images of
an empty corridor would typically be smaller than these values and images of an intricate
pattern such as a crowded shopping mall may be larger than these.
Example of frame size with VB-C60* (JPEG)
Resolution
Quality
1
2
3
4
5
JPEG Small (160x120)
JPEG Medium (320x240)
JPEG Large (640x480)
4.0
4.6
5.2
6.8
18.5
13.0
15.3
17.4
22.9
65.2
40.7
47.1
53.2
69.4
210.5
(KB)
33
System Design Concept
Example of bit rate with VB-C60 *(MPEG-4)
Resolution and Frame Rate
10fps
Quality
1
2
15fps
30fps
MPEG-4 Medium MPEG-4 Large MPEG-4 Medium MPEG-4 Large MPEG-4 Medium MPEG-4 Large
(320x240)
(640x480)
(320x240)
(640x480)
(320x240)
(640x480)
0.28
0.76
0.35
0.94
0.54
1.43
0.39
1.08
0.50
1.30
0.78
2.02
3
4
5
0.60
0.69
0.81
1.67
1.93
2.31
0.75
0.91
1.05
2.02
2.43
2.87
1.20
1.38
1.68
3.31
3.98
4.86
Y
P
O
C
(Mbps)
MPEG-4 data size may increase when recording the video of strenuous movement.
Example of frame size with VB-C300*
Resolution
Quality
1
2
3
4
5
JPEG Small (160x120)
JPEG Medium (320x240)
JPEG Large (640x480)
4.0
4.6
5.2
6.8
18.9
12.5
14.8
16.8
22.3
65.5
36.0
42.4
47.5
62.9
206.0
(KB)
Example of frame size with VB-C50i*
The data size of VB-C50iR and VB-C50FSi is the same as VB-C50i's.
Resolution
Quality
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
JPEG Small (160x120)
JPEG Medium (320x240)
JPEG Large (640x480)
4.0
4.7
5.3
6.0
7.0
8.6
11.9
12.4
14.8
16.7
18.9
22.3
27.5
38.7
39.4
46.2
51.7
58.4
68.2
84.5
124.8
(KB)
34
System Design Concept
* All of the data in the previous page sizes are only rough guide, and may increase or
decrease depending on the object being shot. Please be sure to confirm under the actual
installation conditions before starting operations. Select Video Information from the
View menu of the Viewer (bundled with the Camera Server) to check the data quantity
per frame.
System Overview
Note
1
Please note that data size may increase enormously when video
quality is set to 100 with the VB-C50i, VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VBC50Fi.
The size of audio data is 8 KB/s.
Y
P
O
C
Sensor Event Recording and Motion Detection Recording
Concept
●
Notes on Sensor Event Recording and Motion Detection Recording
When an event, such as sensor input or motion detection, occurs, video data will be
stored in the Storage Server as an operation record.
As the number of stored operation records increased, the operation and search speed at
event detection and response speed of viewers may be affected.
●
Notes on Motion Detection Recording
The Motion Detection function detects motion where no motion occured before.
Do not use this function where the motion detection may operate too frequently, e.g.,
where many people pass through.
Motion detection shoud be set on the Camera Server. If motion detection is set on the
Storage Server, the processing load on the PC will increase, and this may have an
effect on the storage performance. (except VB-C300)
Tip
Refer to “Operation Guideline for Sensor Event Recording” (➝ P.
225) and “Optimization of Motion Detection Recording (Index)”
(➝ P. 226) for details.
35
System Design Concept
Storage Server Performance
<Case 1: in JPEG>
<Case 2: in JPEG>
Camera Servers: 24 units of VB-C60
Resolution: High (640 x 480)
Quality: 3
Frame Rate: 10 fps
Camera Servers: 48 units of VB-C60
Resolution: Medium (320 x 240)
Quality: 3
Frame Rate: 1 fps
[Recording]
Example of Storage Server PC specifications
CPU: Pentium 4 3GHz
Memory: 1GB
HDD: Please refer to “Disk Space
Management <Important>” (➝ P. 64)
(Sample specifications for 3-day storage:
about 1.1 TB for each Storage Server)
[Recording]
Example of Storage Server PC specifications
CPU: Pentium 4 3GHz
Memory: 1GB
HDD: Please refer to “Disk Space
Management <Important>” (➝ P. 64)
(Sample specifications for 14-day storage:
about 900 GB)
Three Storage Servers with the above PC
specifications
(one master Server, two slave Servers)
One Storage Server with the above PC
specifications
Y
P
O
C
[Live View, Recorded Video Playback]
Example of Viewer PC specifications
CPU: Pentium 4 3.8GHz
Memory: 1GB
Video graphics board: NVIDIA Quadro FX
1400
Note
36
[Live View, Recorded Video Playback]
Example of Viewer PC specifications
CPU: Pentium 4 3.0GHz
Memory: 1GB
Video Graphics Board: On-chip board
These data above are rough guide. As many factors can
influence the actual performance possible (including
networking equipment, disk write speed, complexity of camera
image, etc), the actual performance of VK-64/VK-16 recording
in a specific installation will vary. Please be sure to confirm
under the actual installation conditions before starting
operations.
If there are many registered Camera Servers, it is
recommended that you use two or more PCs or configure to
use the Auto-switch function.
System Design Concept
●
Notes on Storage Server Operation
1
It is recommended to use the Storage Server exclusively for the VK-64/VK-16.
System Overview
Be sure to avoid the following forms of operation.
Using the Storage Server with a Web Server
As Storage Server, you cannot use a PC where Web server software such as Windows
standard IIS (Internet Information Server) or Apache has been already installed.
Since the Storage Server uses the HTTP protocol to communicate with the Camera
Server, therefore it may not work properly if other Web applications exist on the same
platform.
Y
P
O
C
The HTTP port number used by the VK-64/VK-16 shoud be fixed to “80”.
Using the Storage Server with a Database Server (e.g., SQL Server, Oracle)
If the hard disk is heavily loaded in database processing, recording may not work
normally. Conversely, the database server may be affected by the VK-64/VK-16 when it
need hard disk performance to complete its task.
Using the Storage Server with a File Server
Accesses to the hard disk may be too frequent and recording may not work normally.
Also, the disk capacity for the VK-64/VK-16 may run short.
Using the Storage Server with other applications
The processing load of other applications may have a negative effect on the storage
performance.
Notes on Viewer Sizing
Consider the following points when selecting the PC for viewer (installed).
Live-video viewing and recorded vidoe playback performance of the VK-64/VK-16
largely depends on the CPU and graphics board performance on the PC. The CPU
performance affects image capturing and video data generation, and the graphics board
performance affects image drawing.
Refer to the following example when selecting the PC for the viewer installed.
In this example, the OS is Windows XP Professional.
1) CPU: Pentium4 3.0GHz, memory: 1GB, graphics board: Quadro FX570
When using the VB-C60 with Resolution=340 x 240 and Quality=3:
Total frame rate:
JPEG image---Max. 220 fps
MPEG-4 video---Max. 180 fps
37
System Design Concept
2) CPU: Pentium4 3.6GHz, memory: 1GB, graphics board: Quadro FX1700
When using the VB-C60 with Resolution=340 x 240 and Quality=3:
Total frame rate:
JPEG image---Max. 260 fps
MPEG-4 video---Max. 210 fps
3) CPU: Pentium4 3.8GHz, memory: 1GB, graphics board: Quadro FX1700
When using the VB-C60 with Resolution=340 x 240 and Quality=3:
Total frame rate:
JPEG image---Max. 280 fps
MPEG-4 video---Max. 240 fps
Tip
Y
P
O
C
The total frame rate is calculated as: Number of Camera
Servers in the Viewer window x Frame rate. That means, with
10 Camera Servers and 10 fps frame rate, the total frame rate
is 100 fps.
Note that the total frame rate above varies depending on the
combination of the PC and graphics board. It is also affected
by other applications (e.g., anti-virus application) running on
the same PC.
When displaying MPEG-4 video in VGA, the maximum frame
rates are the one-forth of the above frame rates.
Network Bandwidth Concept
You should consider the network bandwidth when recording video or viewing live video
from the network camera.
The network bandwidths should be calculated separately for recording and live viewing.
Example:
With one recording server (QVGA, 1 fps) and two live viewing servers (QVGA, 5 fps):
Bandwidth for recording
15 (KB/frame) x 1 (frame/sec) x 8 (bits) = 120 Kbps
Bandwidth for live viewing (per server)
15 (KB/frame) x 5 (frame/sec) x 8 (bits) = 600 Kbps
Therefore, required network bandwidth is calculated as follows:
120 Kbps x 1 + 600 Kbps x 2 = 1320 Kbps = Approx. 1.3 Mbps
Note that the line speed unit is bps (bits per second).
38
VK-Lite
VK-Lite is bundled with the VB-C60. This is a simplified version of the Network Video
Recorder VK-64/VK-16. The differences in functionality between the VK-64/VK-16 and VKLite product versions are summarized below.
System Overview
●
1
Functional Limitations in VK-Lite
• The maximum number of cameras that can be registered is 4 units.
• It is recommended that 8 or less video windows are displayed in the Viewer Window (a
warning is displayed if 9 or more video windows are displayed).
Y
P
O
C
• The maximum frame rate is as follows.
Video recording
Record now
5 fps or less (JPEG)
Fixed at 5 fps
• The reduce frame rate under high load is fixed on.
• The maximum file size can not be changed.
• The supported cameras are as follows.
VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50i, VB-C50iR, VB-C50Fi, and VB-C50FSi
• The VK-Lite Viewer cannot connect to VK-64/VK-16 Storage Server.
• The VK-64/VK-16 Viewer can connect to VK-Lite Storage Server.
However, older versions of the VK-64/VK-16 Viewer cannot connect to VK-Lite Storage
Server.
Note
You cannot connect to the following cameras.
VB-C10, VB-C10R, VB150
39
VK-Lite
●
Functions that cannot be used in VK-Lite
Storage Server
• Recording to NAS
• MPEG-4 recording
• Motion detection recording
• Sensor recording
• A Special day recording
Y
P
O
C
• Send mail on event function
• Customization of event priority
• Connection via HTTP proxy
VK Viewer
• Auto switching function
• Simultaneous monitoring of multiple storage servers
• Designated schedules
• Connection via HTTP proxy
Tip
Functions that cannot be used with the VK-Lite Viewer or VK-Lite
Server are indicated by the following marking in the text.
VK-64/16
●
Other
• Windows Vista Home Premium is also supported in addition to the VK-64/VK-16 system
environments (➝ P.23).
• It is possible to upgrade VK-Lite to VK-64/VK-16.
40
Specifications Comparison of VK-64/VK-16 and VK-Lite
This section explains what you need to know before using the VK-64/VK-16, and the
required operating environment and considerations when designing a system.
Type
Camera
server
connection
Main functional limitaions
Max. number of camera
servers
Available camera servers
Automatic camera server
search
Recording format
Max. recording frame rate
Max. file size setting
Max. retained history of
recorded video
Audio recording / playback
Recording to NAS servers
Other functional limitations
Viewer
VK-Lite v2.0
64 / 16
4
VB-C60, VB-C300,
VB-C50 series, VB-C10/R,
VB-150
VB-C60, VB-C300,
VB-C50 series
JPEG, MPEG-4
30 fps*1
Normal Schedule recording
(Continuous recording,
Sensor event recording,
Motion detection recording)
Special Day Schedule recording
Manual recording
available
32~1024MB, 1~24 hours
JPEG only
5 fps
Normal Schedule recording
(Continuous recording)
Manual recording
999 weeks*1
12 weeks (90 days)
Y
P
O
C
Video recording mode
Storage
Server
VK-64/VK-16 v2.0
Live video format
Max. displaying frame rate
Max. number of video
windows on the viewer
Two-way audio
Registration of multiple
storage servers*2
Layout Sequences*3
Other functional limitations
.
JPEG, MPEG-4
30 fps*1
Fixed
1GB/day (1024MB)
.
Following functions are
unavailable.
• Sending mail when an
event occurs
• Customizing priorities of
events
• Connection via an HTTP
proxy
JPEG, MPEG-4
30 fps*1
Unlimited*1
8 or less is recommended.
.
Following function is
unavailable.
• Connection via HTTP proxy
.
.
*1 Operational limits apply depending on the number of cameras, the PC performance and hard disk
capacity, and the amount of network traffic.
*2 In case of using VK-64/VK-16 with multiple storage servers, you can unify management of
cameras registered to each storage server and the recorded data, if you set one master storage
server. When connecting to each storage server using VK-Lite viewer, you need to switch
connection one by one.
3
* Layout Sequences is a function to switch displayed viewer windows at set intervals.
41
Y
P
O
C
42
Chapter 2
Y
P
O
C
Installation
Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how to install VK-64/VK-16.
1
Setting up the Camera Servers
Firstly set up Camera Server. For connection in detail, refer to the manual for Camera
Server
.
2
Install the Storage Server and Viewer
Note
Before the installation, read Chapter 1 and “Preparation and
Precaution” (➝ P. 48) carefully.
Y
P
O
C
When you install VK-64/VK-16, icons for two applications composing VK-64/VK-16 is
created on the desktop.
Tip
44
Refer to Chapter 3 for how to use the Storage Server.
Refer to Chapter 4 for how to use VK Viewer.
The following icons are displayed if VK-Lite is installed.
Installation Procedures
Note
Types and number of license has been determined for VK-64
and VK-16. If you want to add the Storage Server or Viewer,
you need to purchase necessary software (➝ P. 18).
The hard disk where the software will be installed should be
formatted in the NTFS (➝ P. 48).
2
Start up the Installer
Installation
1
To start installing VK-64/VK-16, insert the
installation CD-ROM into the CD drive, and
then the Welcome screen appears. Click
Next to continue.
Y
P
O
C
If the installer does not automatically
launch, open the CD-ROM directory in
Explorer and double-click Setup.exe. Then,
installation process starts.
To start installing VK-Lite, double-click
VKLiteInstall.exe in the “VBTools” folder
on the VB-C60 Setup CD-ROM.
2
3
The Software License Agreement screen
appears. Read the agreement carefully.
Click the radio button, I accept the terms
in the license agreement and then click
Next to continue.
Enter your License Key(s) and click Next to
install VK-64/VK-16. Your License Key is
indicated on the “About License Key”
included in the package.
* VK-Lite that comes with VB-C60 has a
license for one Storage Server and one
Viewer.
Tip
No License Key registration window appears for VK-Lite
installation.
45
Installation Procedures
4
Depending on your entered License Key for
VK-64/VK-16, one or both of the following
applications shown below:
Viewer
Storage Server
Tip
You cannot change the application
to be installed in this window. To
change the application, you need to
go back to the registration window
and enter the license key again.
Y
P
O
C
For VK-Lite, both of the following applications are installed.
Viewer
Storage Server
When you need to install either one of the above, right-click on the application icon which
you will not install, and choose “This feature will not be available”.
It is recommended not to change the designated installation directory. Click Change to
choose another installation path if necessary, and then select the directory to install the
software.
Click Next to continue. See “Tip” below for the Help and Space buttons.
Tip
Click “disk” and then a list of drives is shown. And also the
amount of required disk space for the installation of VK-64/VK16/VK-Lite.
5
Click Install.
The installation process begins, and a
progress bar is displayed.
46
Installation Procedures
6
When the InstallShield Wizard Completed
screen is displayed, click Finish.
Installation is now completed.
2
Installation
Y
P
O
C
Upgrade from Version 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4
If you upgrade the Viewer from an older version, all the settings are taken over to the new
version and video data recorded with older version can be played back with Version 2.0. It
is recommended to confirm your settings after the upgrading.
For the details, see “Upgrading VK-64/VK-16” (➝ P. 245).
Note
If you are using VK-64/VK-16 with NAS server, you need to set
up log-on settings again after upgrading VK from v1.3 or 1.4 to
v2.0.
Version 2.0 of the Viewer is able to connect to versions 1.2,
1.3, and 1.4 of the Storage Server. All of the versions are able
to be selected as the Master Storage Server. However, the
following functions are specific to version 2.0, and cannot be
used on previous versions of the Storage Server.
• VB-C60 registration
• Audio-related settings
• Retrieving summary information from a Storage Server
Viewer v2.0 cannot connect to the Storage Server v1.0 or v1.1.
Older version of Viewer cannot connect to the Storage Server
v2.0.
Version 2.0 of the Storage Server can continue to use the
video data and storage settings from previous versions.
When upgrading from any versions before 1.1.2.27, you need
to set motion detection (➝ P. 124) again. You can check your
version information from the “Version information” dialog box
(➝ P. 295) of the Storage Server and the Viewer.
47
Installation Procedures
Preparation and Precaution
●
Use NTFS-formatted hard disk
The hard disk where the software will be installed and video data will be stored should be
formatted in the NTFS.
You can convert the current hard disk into the NTFS format using the following command
at the command prompt.
“convert (Name of the drive):/fs:ntfs”
Example:
To convert Drive C into the NTFS format:
Y
P
O
C
convert c:/fs:ntfs
Tip
●
Select All Programs, Accessories, and Command Prompt from
the Start menu to display the command prompt. If you press the
Enter key following the command shown above, a series of
questions appears, then conversion starts. Reboot the PC after
the process completes conversion. Any data on the hard disk is
not lost by conversion.
Stop other applications
You should stop other applications including anti-virus program before starting installation.
48
Chapter 3
Y
P
O
C
Storage Server
Configuration Reference
Chapter Overview
The Storage Server can record videos and events (sensor input and motion detection) data
from multiple camera servers.
This chapter explains how to set the installed Storage Server to use the storage server.
Use the Storage Server Configuration dialog to set the Storage Server.
In the Storage Server Configuration dialog, you can configure settings for disk
management, event management, event notification, and user management.
●
Settings Tab
●
Event Tab
Y
P
O
C
In the Settings tab, specify the Storage Server name, Proxy Server, and recording
options.
You can set the Storage Server to send an e-mail to the user when an event has occurred.
In the Event tab, specify the priority for each event type.
●
Event Notification Tab
●
User Management Tab
In the Event Notification tab, configure the settings for sending an e-mail when an event
has occurred.
In the User Management tab, add users and assign privileges to them.
50
Storage Server Configuration Dialog
How to Start-Up
Double-click the Storage Server Configuration desktop icon.
Alternatively, from the Windows Start menu select: All Programs >
WebView Livescope > Network Video Recorder VK Series v2.0 >
Storage Server Configuration.
If the Authentication is required when starting this tool is checked
(➝ P. 74), the Login dialog appears.
3
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
In this case, enter your user name and password, and click Login.
If User Account Control is enabled on Windows Vista, the User
Account Control screen will appear.
In this case,click the Allow button.
Note
To configure the Storage Server, you should log into Windows
with the Windows Administrator privilege.
51
Storage Server Configuration Dialog
Screen Configuration
The Storage Server Configuration dialog has the following four tabs.
Settings Tab
Events Tab
Event Notification Tab
User Management Tab
●
Settings Tab
Y
P
O
C
In the Storage Server Configuration dialog, Settings tab allows you to configure these
items below.
Storage Server Name Proxy Server Recording options
Click the title bar icon and select About Storage
Server Configuration or right-click the title bar to
display the About Storage Server Configuration
box.
Enter name for your Storage Server.
Enter proxy address for connecting to Camera
Servers.
Set Maximum retained history, Maximum file
size/duration and Low Disk Space Warning Level.
Set maximum disk space used for each device.
Also, add or remove network drives.
Storage Server status indicator. Start Storage
Server and Stop Storage Server start and stop the
Storage Server.
Use an account other than the Local System
account to log onto the Storage Server to enable
connection to the network drive.
Click Apply to save changes when you modify
settings from each tab.
VK-64/VK-16 can save video data on the network drive.
Tip
52
Storage Server Configuration Dialog
●
Events Tab
You can set the Storage Server to send an e-mail to the user when an event has occurred.
In the Storage Server Configuration dialog, Events tab allows you to configure the
priority for types of the event.
E-mails are sent according to the priorities set in the Events tab.
3
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
Select a suitable event priority from
the drop-down menu for each event
type listed.
Note
Events associated with “Storage Server started/stopped”,
“User log in”, and “Network drive assignment error” do not
appear in a Viewer’s Timeline (➝ P. 204), Live Events Log (➝
P. 212), or Event Search Dialog (➝ P. 214).
The priority of an event created by a manual recording using
Record Now (➝ P. 208) will always be Priority 1. It cannot be
changed from this dialog above.
53
Storage Server Configuration Dialog
●
Event Notification Tab
In the Storage Server Configuration dialog, Event Notification tab allows you to
configure the setting of the e-mail sent to the user when the event occurs.
E-mails are sent according to the priorities set in the Events tab.
Example event notification e-mail
An event of priority 3 occurred on 12/05/2006 at 15:15:17 +1000.
Parking Lot 1: Sensor on
Y
P
O
C
Enable e-mail notification and select
a priority. Events of that priority and
above will lead to notification emails.
Enter the e-mail subject line, for
example, “Immediate Action
Required”. Enter the address of the
recipient and enter your from
address.
Enter a Host Name or IP address
and Port Number of mail server for
outgoing mail.
Enable authentication (POP-beforeSMTP) for connection and enter
User Name, Password and POP
Server details.
If this is enabled, the Storage
Server will attempt to perform a
POP login before sending e-mail
that may be required for some
SMTP servers.
Tip
54
You can only register one e-mail address in the To Address field.
If you want to send the e-mail to multiple addresses, use a group
address.
Storage Server Configuration Dialog
●
User Management Tab
In the Storage Server Configuration dialog, User Management tab allows you to set up
users and their privileges.
User Management tab allows you to configure the following privileges:
Administrator
Not Administrator (Operator)
Administrator has access to the Viewer including Camera Server setup, recording
schedules and Viewer setup.
3
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
Check to enable user to have
Administrator privileges (full access
to configuration functions).
Use Add to add users to this field.
There is no limit to the number of
users you can add.
If the Authentication is required
when starting this tool box should be
checked.
Click Apply to save changes.
Users who have Operator Status cannot configure, register and change Camera Servers,
or configure and change recording schedules.
By default, a user called “admin” is created. The password is “NVR”. It is strongly
recommended that this should be changed after installation.
It is necessary to set up users on all Storage Servers. A particular user should be set up to
have the same password on each Storage Server.
55
Set the Settings Tab
In the Storage Server Configuration dialog, Settings tab allows you to configure the
items below.
Storage Server name
Proxy Server
Settings for storing recorded video
Start and stop of Storage Server
Logon Account for Storage Server
How to Display the Settings Tab
Double-click the Storage Server Configuration desktop icon.
Y
P
O
C
The Storage Server Configuration dialog appears and the Settings tab is displayed.
How to set the Settings Tab
●
Changing the Storage Server name
Enter a new name in Storage Server
Name to change the Storage Server
name (You can use up to 20 characters).
Tip
56
It is recommended to use an easy-to-understand name if you are
using multiple Storage Servers.
Setting the Settings Tab
●
Enter the Storage Server Proxy Address
VK-64/16
If the Storage Server needs to access
Camera Servers via proxy server, you
may need to configure proxy settings.
* See “When using a proxy server” (➝ P. 12).
1
2
In the Storage Server Proxy
field, tick the Enable the
following proxy server box.
3
Enter the Proxy server address
and Port.
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
For more information on proxy server usage, contact your Camera Server administrator.
●
Enter Recorded Video Settings
1
2
VK-64/16
Maximum retained history Check the Maximum retained
history option and enter a value
from 1 to 999 and then select
Days or Weeks from the dropdown menu.
Maximum file size/duration - Check the Maximum file size/duration option, enter
a value, and select MB or Hours. You can enter 32 - 1024 for MB and 1 - 24 for
Hours. If you do not enter a value, 1024 MB or 24 hours is used for the Maximum
file size/duration value.
3
4
Low disk space warning level - Enter a percent value.
When the remaining space falls below the specified value, the event will be
displayed and a notification will be e-mailed (➝ P. 53, 71).
VK-64/16
Reduce recording frame rate when disk is under high load - When disk is highly
loaded, recording frame rate is temporarily reduced to prevent the recording from
stopped. Refer to Chapter 6 for details. This function is available for JPEG video
recording. It cannot be used for MPEG-4 video recording (VB-C60).
57
Setting the Settings Tab
Tip
Note
●
If Reduce recording frame rate when disk is under high load is
checked, you will receive an event notification such as Effective
“Recording rate (<recording rate before change> ➝ <recording
rate after change> %)” when the recording frame rate drops.
Ex. “Effective Recording rate (100.0 ➝ 90.0 %)”
When the free disk space has fallen below the value specified in
the Low Disk Space Warning Level field, an event occurs and an
event notification mail is sent. Also, if the used disk space
exceeds the value specified in the Maximum disk space used
field, recorded video will not be saved until the required free disk
space is secured. Refer to P. 64 for the disk space management.
Y
P
O
C
Select Disk Drive Settings
Drive - Select the disk drive to
configure, from the drop-down
menu.
Maximum disk space used 2 Check the box and enter a value
in Megabytes (MB) or Gigabytes
(GB), for example, “50”.
This establishes the maximum
disk space used for all video
files on the specified drive.
Add Network Drive - Add a disk drive on the network used as the network drive.
The added network drive is shown on the Drive drop-down menu.
1
3
4
●
Delete Network Drive - Delete an added network drive.
Adding Removing a Network Drive
VK-64/16
By adding a network drive, you can save recorded video data on a network drive such as
NAS (Network Attached Storage) in addition to the internal HDD.
If you add a network drive in the Storage Server Configuration window, the drive will be
added to the list of the pull-down menu of the Add/Edit Camera Server dialog (➝ P. 93,
100).
Note
Tip
58
Use recommended NAS servers with Windows Storage Server
2003 or Windows Storage Server 2003 R2.
When using the Storage Server with the local system account,
the Add Network Drive and Delete Network Drive buttons are
disabled.
Setting the Settings Tab
To add a network drive
1
Click Add Network Drive.
3
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
2
The Add Network Drive dialog appears.
Select a drive to add as a network drive
and enter a path assigned to the drive.
You can also enter a path automatically
by selecting a folder.
When selecting a folder with Browse
Click Browse, select a folder where you want
to save recorded video data in the Browse
for Folder dialog. Click OK to enter the path
of the selected folder in the path field.
3
Enter the user name and password to access the network drive in the respective
fields, and click OK.
Be sure to use different user name and password from the logon user name and
password for the local system account.
If addition is successful, the added drive appears on the drive selection pull-down
menu.
59
Setting the Settings Tab
To remove a network drive
Select a network drive and click OK to delete
the selected drive from the Storage Server.
Note
60
About Network Drive
VK-64/VK-16 can record videos on a drive on the network. The
drive type is shown at the head of the Drive drop-down menu
as “Internal disk: local, Network drive: network”.
About Video Recording Operation
If disk space is not enough to cover the specified value
configured with Maximum disk space used, the retained
duration of recorded video may be shorter than the specified
period or the recording may be temporarily stopped. Please be
sure to perform sufficient tests before starting operations.
For details about disk space management on the Storage
Server, refer to “Disk Space Management” (➝ P. 64).
Windows does not allow a user who has logged in with a local
system account (used for normal service management) to add
a network drive. The Add network drive and Delete network
drive items are disabled while you are logging into Windows
with a local system account. To set the network drive, click
Stop Storage Server to stop the Storage Server, and click the
Logon Settings and switch to an account which is allowed to
use the network drive (i.e., account with Windows’
Administrator and Logon As Service privileges). Refer to P.63
for the Logon As Service privilege.
You cannot use a UNC path or removable disk when adding a
network drive.
If you add or delete a network drive, the Storage Server
program will reboot.
Multiple Storage Servers cannot use the same network drive
simultaneously.
Single network drive cannot allocate to multiple drivers.
If the selected network drive cannot be accessed because the
network is disconnected, the selected drive is powered off, or you
entered a wrong path, the following error message will appear.
“Network path cannot be found.”
While the network drive is not operating (e.g., due to network
disconnection), video will not be recorded until the drive
recovers.
If a storage server is booted when the storage server is unable
to connect to a NAS server, video image data won’t be written
to or recorded data won’t be read from NAS server even after
the NAS server recovers. In such case, reboot the storage
server.
Y
P
O
C
Setting the Settings Tab
●
Start or Stop the Storage Server Program
Click Stop Storage Server to stop the
Storage Server.
Click Start Storage Server to start the
Storage Server.
Note
Y
P
O
C
Change the Logon Settings
1
2
3
4
Storage Server Configuration Reference
●
3
If you need to stop the Storage Server Program, you should
inform all users connected to the storage server before you stop
the storage server.
If you need to log onto the
Storage Server with another
account when using a network
drive, click Stop Storage Server.
After the Storage Server stops,
click Logon Settings.
The Log on as dialog appears.
If you are logging onto the
Storage Server with a Local
System account, select Local
System Account. If you are log
onto the Storage Server with
another account, enter the
account name in Account and
password in Password and
confirm password.
Click OK.
Click Start Storage Server to start the Storage Server with the specified account.
Note
If you are using VK-64/VK-16 with NAS server, you need to
set up log-on settings again after upgrading VK from v1.3 or v1.4
to v2.0.
61
Setting the Settings Tab
Message
●
When you have changed items affecting recording settings:
When you click Apply or End, the following message will appear.
“Item affecting recording setting has been changed.
To see how setting is affected, use Recording Setting Summary Display in the Recording
Schedules window of the Viewer.”
●
When you have changed the Maximum retained history setting:
Y
P
O
C
When you click Apply or End, the following message will appear.
“Changing the maximum retained history may delete recorded video. Are you sure to
continue?”
●
When you have added or deleted a network drive:
When you click Apply or End before restarting the storage server, the following message
appears.
“Drive configuration has been changed and Storage Server should be restarted. Are you
sure to restart Storage Server?”
62
Setting the Settings Tab
Logon As Service Privilege
When you want to add the Logon As Service privilege to an existing Windows account so
that you may be able to configure network drive settings, perform the following steps
before configuring the logon settings.
1
Click Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, Administration Tool, and
Local Security Policy from the Windows’ Start menu.
The Local Security Policy dialog appears.
2
Select Local Policy and User Privilege
Assignment from the tree to the left.
3
Y
P
O
C
4
5
6
7
8
Storage Server Configuration Reference
3
Double-click Logon as Service from
the list to the right.
The Logon as Service Properties
dialog oppears.
Click Add User or Group.
The Select User or Group dialog
oppears.
Enter the Windows account name in
the Enter object name to select field.
Enter or change the object name,
location, and detail settings as
required.
Be sure to enter a Windows account
with Administrator privileges.
Click OK.
The Logon as Service Properties
dialog reappears.
Click OK.
The Local Security Settings dialog reappears.
Close the Local Security Settings dialog.
63
Disk Space Management <Important>
Disk Space Management Level
The Storage Server monitors the remaining disk space to check the current disk space
manegement level and takes a measure according to the current level.
1) Low Disk Space Warning Level
2) Threshold Level
3) Limit Level
Administrator can set the Low disk space warning level 1) using the Low Disk Space
Warning Level field in the Settings tab.
The Storage Server calculates the values for Threshold Level 2) and Limit Level 3) based
on various conditions and settings.
Y
P
O
C
Handling at Each Level
The Storage Server performs the following when the disk space reaches each level.
●
In case of Low Disk Space Warning Level
The Storage Server generates an event when the disk space available for recording (i.e.,
free space from the Maximum disk space used value) has fallen down to a certain level.
If the Maximum disk space used field is not set, the entire drive capacity of the drive
specified in the Drive field is considered to be the maximum disk space used.
Event Notification
[Maximum disk
space used]
<Drive>
Low disk : warning
Warning Level
Note
Tip
64
The event notification e-mail is sent when the priority specified for
the Low Disk Space Warning Level option in the Event tab of the
Storage Server Configuration dialog is equal to or higher than the
priority specified in the Event Notification tab. Refer to P. 68 and P.
70 for how to set the Events and Event Notification tabs.
Event notification allows early control by an administrator to
avoid problems due to running out of disk space (for example,
removing unnecessary recording schedules).
Disk Space Management <Important>
●
In case of Threshold Level
The Storage Server continues recording video; however, it starts deleting the video files
from the oldest one, and generates an event.
Low disc <Drive>
deletion : start
[Maximum disk
space used]
Delete from
the oldest file
3
Event Notification
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
Threshold Level
Tip
●
Old video files may be deleted even if these are within the
“Maximum retained history” period.
However if the oldest file is currently used in the Viewer (for
example for playback of recorded video), it would not be deleted
and the next oldest file will be deleted instead. Deletion will
continue until the free space rises above this threshold again.
Refer to Chapter 7 for saving files.
In case of Limit Level
The Storage Server stops recording video when the free disk space goes down to this
level, and generates an event.
When the free disk space increases above this level by deleting old video files, the Storage
Server resume recording video and generates an event.
Low disc <Drive>
rec. : stop
[Maximum disk
space used]
Delete from
Stop Recording the oldest file
Event Notification
Limit Level
65
Disk Space Management <Important>
Low Disk Space Warning Level Calculation Method
The Low Disk Space Warning Level occurs when the Storage Server fulfills the condition
1) or 2) below.
1) When the Storage Server disk space used exceeds the following value:
M x (100 - A)/100
M: Value for Maximum disk space used
A: Value for Low disk space warning level
Example: In case of the value for Maximum disk space used is 100 GB and the value
for Low disk space warning level is 10%, the Storage Server reaches the Low disk
space warning level when the remaining free disk space becomes 10 GB or less.
Y
P
O
C
2) When free disk space falls below the following value:
Disk capacity x A/100
A: Value for Low disk space warning level
Example: In case of the value for disk capacity is 80 GB and the value for Low disk
space warning level is 10%, the Storage Server reaches the Low Disk Space Warning
Level when the remaining free disk space becomes 8 GB or less.
Tip
If other applications are also using the same hard disk, you need
to review the condition 2). Even if the Storage Server uses a
small quantity of disk space, it may reach the Low Disk Space
Warning Level because other applications has consumed disk
space.
Threshold Level Calculation Method
The Threshold Level occurs when the Storage Server fulfills the condition 1) or 2) below.
1) When the Storage Server disk space used exceeds the following value:
a. When Maximum disk space used is set 384 MB or more,
Maximum disk space used - 96MB
b. When Maximum disk space used is set 384 MB or less,
Maximum disk space used x 3/4
2) When free disk space falls below the following value:
(Number of Camera Servers + 1) x 32MB + 96MB
66
Disk Space Management <Important>
Limit Level Calculation Method
The Limit Level occurs when the Storage Server fulfills the condition 1) or 2) below.
1) When the Storage Server disk space used exceeds the following value:
Maximum disk space used
2) A When free disk space falls below the following value:
(Number of Camera Servers + 1) x 32MB
3
Calculation Example for Each Level
Disk Capacity
C Drive
100GB
200GB
D Drive
Free Disk Space
Max. Disk Space Used
Camera Server No.
50GB
40GB
19 units
200GB
200GB
19 units
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
Disk Drive
The following is a table of values for each level calculated based on the examples above.
Disk Drive
Low Disk Warning Level
Threshold Level
C Drive
1) 40GB x (100-10) / 100=36GB
2) 100GB x 10 / 100=10GB
D Drive
1) 200GB x (100-10) / 100=180GB 1) 200GB-96MB=199.904GB 1) 200GB
2) 200GB x 10 / 100=20GB
2) (19+1) x 32MB+96MB=736MB
2) (19+1) x 32MB=640MB
Note
1) 40GB-96MB=39.904GB
2) (19+1) x 32MB+96MB=736MB
Limit Level
1) 40GB
2) (19+1) x 32MB=640MB
“Threshold Level” can be used as a protective level to avoid
achieving “Limit Level”. It is recommended that you take
measures when “Low Disk Space Warning Level” event
notification is generated, such as deleting unnecessary video
files.
Storing video data above the Threshold Level increases load
over the Storage Server and may cause recording interruption.
It is strongly recommended to use the Storage Server below
the Threshold Level.
Refer to “Operation Guideline for Recording and Viewing” (➝
P. 223) for detailed of operation.
If e-mail notification for each levels are set, the system can be
configured to provide e-mail notifications when one of these
levels is reached (➝ P. 70).
The requirements of “Threshold Level” may be achieved
before the requirements of “Low Disk Space Warning Level”
are satisfied, depending on circumstances. For example, large
numbers of cameras with limited disk capacity may bring a
larger value for “(Numbers of camera +1) x 32 MB + 96 MB”,
compared with the value of “Disk capacity x Low disk space
warning level/100”.
67
Set Events Tab
VK-64/16
Events tab in the Storage Server Configuration dialog allows you to specify event
priorities.
If you have configured the event notification e-mail settings, e-mails are sent based on the
priorities set in the Events tab.
How to Display the Events Tab
Double-click the Storage Server Configuration desktop icon.
The Storage Server Configuration dialog appears and the Settings tab is displayed.
Click the Events tab to open it.
Y
P
O
C
68
Setting the Events Tab
How to Set the Events Tab
●
Set the Priority for the Event
Select the priority for the event from drop-down menu for each setting item.
Item
Recording engine started
Setting
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Remote trigger
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Recording
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Data file set
Y
P
O
C
Storage Server Configuration Reference
User log in
3
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Low disk space warning
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Low disk space deletion
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Low disk space rec. suspended
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Camera Server Connection error
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Change recording frame rate
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Failed to map a network drive
1. Highest, 2. High, 3. Medium, 4. Low, 5. Lowest
Values shown in bold are the initial setting priority.
Note
Events associated with “Recording”, “User log in”, and
“Failed to map a network drive” do not appear in a Viewer’s
Timeline (➝ P. 204), Live Events Log (➝ P. 212), or Event
Search Dialog (➝ P. 214).
To detect such a event, set the e-mail notification using the
Event Notification tab (➝ P. 70).
69
Set the Event Notification Tab
VK-64/16
Event Notification tab in the Storage Server Configuration dialog allows you to
configure.
Configure the e-mail notification settings based on the priorities set in the Events tab.
How to Display the Event Notification Tab
Double-click the Storage Server Configuration desktop icon.
The Storage Server Configuration dialog appears and the Settings tab is displayed.
Click the Event Notification tab to open it.
Y
P
O
C
How to Set the Event Notification Tab
●
1
Set the Event Notification Priority
Check the Send E-mail when event occurs option and select the priority level
for sending e-mails from the Priority drop-down menu. Events of the setting priority
and above will lead to e-mail notification .
2
70
Enter a subject in the E-mail subject
line (e.g., “Immediate Action
Required”), recipient’s address in the
To Address: line, and sender’s
address in the From Address: line.
Setting the Event Notification Tab
Note
Tip
You can enter each of the subject, recipient’s address, and
sender’s address in up to 100 characters.
You can only register one e-mail address in the To Address field.
If you want to send the e-mail to multiple addresses, use a group
address.
3
3
Enter the host name or IP address
of the SMTP server in SMTP Server
and port number in Port.
Storage Server Configuration Reference
Y
P
O
C
Enter the host name in up to 255 characters.
Note
4
Note
Tip
If you wan to use “POP-beforeSMTP” for user authentication,
check the Use POP-before-SMTP
option, and enter the user name
used for authentication in User
Name and password in Password.
Also, enter the host name or IP
address of the POP server in POP
Server and port number in Port.
Enter the user name in up to 100 characters.
Enter the password in up to 20 characters.
Enter the host name in up to 255 characters.
If this function is enabled, the Storage Server will attempt to
perform a POP login before sending e-mail that may be required
for some SMTP servers.
Example event notification e-mail
An event of priority 3 occurred on 12/05/2006 at 15:15:17 +1000.
Parking Lot 1: Sensor on
71
Set User Management Tab
User Management tab in the Storage Server Configuration dialog allows you to set up
users and their privileges.
How to Display the User Management Tab
Double-click the Storage Server Configuration desktop icon.
The Storage Server Configuration dialog appears and the Settings tab is displayed.
Click the User Management tab to open it.
Y
P
O
C
Administrator and Operator Status User
Administrators can access to the Viewer to perform Camera Server setup, recording
schedules and Viewer setup.
Operator Status Users can only access the Viewer windows (➝ P. 166) created by
Administrator. Also, they only can access to live video and recorded video on Storage
Servers they have permission to access.
Note
72
Users who have Operator Status cannot configure, register
and change Camera Servers, or configure and change
recording schedules.
By default, a user called “admin” is created. Its password is
“NVR”. It is strongly recommended to change the user name
and password after installation.
It is necessary to set up user settings on all Storage Servers.
A particular user, who operates multiple recording servers,
should be set up to have the same password on each Storage
Server.
Set the User Management Tab
How to Set the User Management Tab
●
Add a User
1
Click Add on the User Management tab.
The Add User dialog appears.
2
Enter the user’s User Name (up to 20 characters, including alphanumeric letters and
underscore “_”).
3
3
Y
P
O
C
Storage Server Configuration Reference
4
Enter the user’s Password (up to 20 characters, including alphanumeric letters and
underscore “_”). Re-enter the password you have entered in the Confirm Password
field to confirm it.
Click OK.
The dialog closes and the new user is displayed in the User List.
Change User to Administrator
1
2
Check the Administrator option of a user in the User List to enable the user to have
the Administrator privileges. Do not check the option if you do not want to enable the
user to have the Administrator privileges.
Click Apply to save changes.
Note
●
1
2
3
4
The VK-64/VK-16 Administrator status is not related to the
Windows Administrator status.
Change User Password
Click to select a user in the User List to change the password.
Click Edit button below in the user list to bring up the Edit User dialog.
Enter the user’s New Password (up to 20 characters, including alphanumeric letters
and underscore “_”). Re-enter the new password you have entered in the Confirm
Password field.
Click OK.
The new password is saved.
73
Setting the User Management Tab
Delete a User
1
2
Click to select a user in the User List to delete it.
Click Remove.
The user is deleted.
Request User Authentication at Tool Startup
Check the Authentication is required
when starting this tool if user
authentication is required when launching
the tool. If this option is checked, the
Login dialog appears before the Storage
Server Configuration dialog appears.
Y
P
O
C
74
Chapter 4
Y
P
O
C
Register Camera Server
and Set Recording Schedule
Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how to store Camera Servers registration necessary for creating
recording schedules on the Storage Server, as well as the procedure to create recoding
schedules.
To store the Camera Servers registration and create recording schedules, launch the VK
Viewer and use the Camera Summary window and Recording Schedules window under
the Configuration and Preferences screen.
Y
P
O
C
76
Launch VK Viewer and Display the Configuration and Preferences Screen
How to Launch VK-64/VK-16
Double-click the VK Viewer desktop icon.
Alternatively, from the Windows Start menu select: All Programs >
WebView Livescope > Network Video Recorder VK Series v2.0 >
VK Viewer.
The connect option menu (Start-up Screen) for Storage Server is displayed.
Select Master Storage Server option and click Connect.
Start-up Screen
localhost
Connects to Storage Server
and starts the Viewer. Select
this option to use the local
PC where Viewer is installed
as the Master Storage
Server.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Use IP address
Connects to Storage Server
and starts the Viewer by
specifying its IP address.
Select this option when the
Storage Server and the
Viewer are installed on
separate PCs.
Not use Storage Server
Select this option to use the
Viewer only without connecting
to a Storage Server.
Note
Tip
If you want to add a Storage Server to the connect option menu,
login the desired Storage Server by specifying its IP address and
click Add Storage Server in the Viewer Settings window (➝ P.
167).
If multiple Storage Servers are being used, you can setup one
of them as the Master Storage Server.
If the Storage Servers v1.2, v1.3, v1.4 or v2.0 coexist in the
system, either Storage Server can be specified as the Master
Storage Server.
Older viewer than Viewer 2.0 cannot connect to the Storage
Server v2.0.
If you want to connect to the Storage Server directly without
displaying Start-up Screen, uncheck When starting Master
Storage Server is selected in the Viewer Settings window
(➝ P. 167).
77
Launch VK Viewer and Display the Configuration and Preferences Screen
How to Start VK-Lite
Double-click on the icon VK-Lite Viewer v2.0 on the desktop.
Alternatively, from the Windows Start menu > All Programs > WebView
Livescope > Network Video Recorder VK Series v2.0 > VK Viewer 2.0.
The following procedure is the same as VK-64/VK-16.
Launch by Connecting to the Localhost
If you want to use the local PC for viewer as well as Master Storage Server, connect to
recording server on local PC to start the Viewer.
Y
P
O
C
1
2
3
Tip
78
Select localhost from the
drop-down menu.
Click Connect.
Enter your User Name and
Password, and click Login.
The default user name and password are as follows:
User name: admin
Password: NVR
It is strongly recommended to change the user name and
password after installation.
The Viewer can be launched directly without displaying Startup Screen and Login dialog (➝ P. 163).
Launch VK Viewer and Display the Configuration and Preferences Screen
Launch Storage Server by Specifying the IP address
If you installed the Viewer and Storage Server on separate PC, specify an IP address of
Storage Server and connect Viewer to the Storage Server.
1
2
3
Enter the IP address or host
name of the Master Storage
Server in Host Name or IP,
and the port number in Port.
4
Click Connect.
Enter your User Name and
Password, and then click
Login.
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
5
Tip
Click Connect.
Y
P
O
C
4
Note
Select Use IP address from
the drop-down menu.
If you use a proxy server, you should change the Internet
option settings in the following procedure:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet >
Internet Option.
2. Select the Connection tab.
3. Click LAN settings.
Change the proxy server settings.
If using a proxy server between a Viewer and a Storage Server,
it should not perform response buffering. The Proxy Server
which is configured to perform response buffering may lead to
delays in sending small amounts of data (such as events) from
the Storage Server to the Viewer. You cannot use the Apache
proxy server since it perform response buffering.
You cannot send or receive audio when using a proxy server.
The dialog for entering the IP address will also be displayed even
when connection to the Storage Server failed.
79
Launch VK Viewer and Display the Configuration and Preferences Screen
When the Viewer accesses to a Master Storage Server which has not been set up with
camera server information, the entire Viewing Screen is initially blank as shown below.
You should configure the Viewer using the Configuration and Preferences screen.
Note
80
Y
P
O
C
It is strongly recommended that only one Administrator perform
configuration on each network.
Launch VK Viewer and Display the Configuration and Preferences Screen
Access to the Configuration and Preferences screen
To open the Configuration and Preferences screen, the following operation should be
performed.
●
In the Menu Bar, select View ➝ Configuration
The menu bar is located at the top left of the
Viewing Screen.
In the Menu Bar, select View ➝ Configuration.
Y
P
O
C
The Configuration and Preferences screen
appears.
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
81
Storage and Camera Server Summary windows
Use the Storage and Camera Server Summary screen to create a location and zone, to
add the Storage Server, and to add the Camera Server.
Display the Storage and Camera Server Summary Windows
1
Launch the VK Viewer and display the Configuration and Preferences screen.
2
Click the Camera Summary tab.
The Storage and Camera Server Summary
windows appear.
The window consists of two sub-windows which
are opened by their respective tabs, Storage
Servers and Locations/Zones.
When the
Storage Servers
tab is selected
Y
P
O
C
When the Locations / Zones tab is selected
Tree area
82
Summary Area
Click and drag scrollbar(s) to view any portions of the
Summary Area that are not visible.
Storage and Camera Server Summary windows
Note
If you are using the Viewer only, the Camera Server,
Location/Zone, and Camera Type are only displayed in the
Camera Server List.
Click and drag divider line to the right to
show full items.
Y
P
O
C
Storage Servers and Locations/Zones options
4
The following options are available via the Storage Servers tab.
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Add Storage Server - Allows you to register a
Storage Server with the system (up to ten
Servers are recommended).
Edit - Allows you to change the address of the
selected Storage Server.
Select a Storage Server from the tree in the left panel. The right panel will update with a list
of Camera Servers recorded by the Storage Server you selected.
The following options are available via the Locations/Zones tab.
Add Location - Allows you to add a new location
to the system.
Add Zone - Allows you to add zones to
locations.
When you select a zone within a location in the left panel, a list of cameras in that zone is
displayed in the right panel.
Other Functions in Both Tabs
Camera server functions are located on the right-hand panel regardless of which tab is
selected.
Find Camera Servers - Allows you to initiate a network search for unlisted Camera
Servers on the LAN and register it.
Add Camera Server - Allows you to add a Camera Server to the system.
Edit Camera Server - Allows you to edit an existing Camera Server’s settings.
Remove Camera Server - Allows you to remove a Camera Server from the system.
83
Location and Zone
Create a location and zone for the preparation of registering the Camera Server.
Cameras are grouped into Locations and Zones. Locations are for example, an office
building, shop or school. Zones are a part of Locations, that is, a zone could be assigned
to each floor in the office building and specific areas in a shop such as a cash register
area.
The diagram below illustrates an example of physical Locations and Zones on a VK64/VK-16 network. Viewer access is performed via the Location and Zone drop-down
menus.
Zone 1
Y
P
O
C
Zone 2
Zones are different areas of the one
Location.
Location #1 (Shopping Mall)
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Location #2
Zone 6
Zone 7
Location #3
Zone 8
84
Once Locations and Zones are configured,
Locations and Zones are selected from the
Viewing Screen Camera Selection area.
When you select other locations, their Zones
are displayed.
Location and Zone
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
When a Location is selected from the drop-down menu at left, all of the Zones associated with the
Location will appear to the right as camera thumbnail images.
This tab containing four thumbnail images indicates that there are four cameras in the Zone.
This tab containing six thumbnail images indicates that there are six
cameras in the Zone.
Note
The Location/Zone hierarchy is independent of the grouping of
cameras into Storage Servers. For example, a single Storage
Server may record video from multiple Locations, and
cameras from a single Location can be recorded to multiple
Storage Servers.
When multiple Storage Servers are used and a Storage Server
which already has registered Camera Servers is changed to
the Master Storage Server, thumbnails of registered Camera
Servers may not be displayed. In this case, update the
thumbnails by clicking Connect on the Edit Camera Server
dialog for each Camera Server on the Master Storage Server.
85
Location and Zone
Add a Location and Zone
●
Step 1: Click Add Location on the Locations/Zones tab
1
2
In the Camera Summary window,
select the Locations/Zones tab if it is
not selected yet.
Click Add Location to bring up the Add
Location dialog.
Y
P
O
C
3
●
Enter the new location name
(up to 20 characters), then
click OK.
Step 2: Click Add Location on the Locations/Zones tab
1
2
In the Camera Summary window,
select the Locations/Zones tab if it is
not selected yet.
Click Add Zone to bring up the Add
Zone dialog.
3
4
Enter the new zone name
(up to 20 characters).
Select a location from the
drop-down menu in the
Location field, then click
OK.
The selected zone will now
appear in the specified
Location folder.
Note
86
If you want to add a Zone to another location not listed, you
should first create the Location before you add the Zone.
Each Location name must be unique and each Zone name
within a Location must be unique as well.
There is no limitation on the number of Zones and Locations
that can be added.
Location and Zone
Edit a Location and Zone
1
2
Double-click a location or zone.
The Edit Location or Edit Zone dialog appears.
Change the settings and click OK.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Delete a Location and Zone
1
2
Click a location or zone in the list to highlight it and select Delete from the Edit
menu.
Alternatively, click a location or zone to select it, then press the Delete key on your
keyboard.
A confirmation dialog will appear. Click Yes.
Click No to cancel deletion.
87
Add Storage Server
VK-64/16
If you are using multiple Storage Servers, add each Storage Server as directed below. You
need not perform these steps if you are using only one Storage Server and that Storage
Server has already been added.
By adding the Storage Server, you can select the Camera Servers managed by each
Storage Server from the Viewer screen.
Note
Tip
If you are using the Viewer only, the Storage Servers tab is not
shown and you cannot add the Storage Server.
You can operate VK-64 with up to 10 Storage Servers, and up to
192 Camera Servers can be operated.
Y
P
O
C
Display Storage and Camera Server Summary Windows
Launch the VK Viewer and display the Storage and Camera Server Summary window.
Add Storage Server
1
2
In the Storage and Camera Server
Summary, select the Storage Servers
tab.
Click Add Storage Server to bring up
the Add Storage Server dialog.
3
88
Enter connection settings
and click OK.
Add Storage Server
Note
Do not add the same Storage Server more than once.
If you add a Storage Server with a different configuration
(such as one managed by another Master Storage Server),
your original Locations and Zones will be invalid.
You need to change Windows settings of a storage server to
be added before if you are using Windows XP SP2 or Windows
Server 2003. Refer to “Notes on Operating Environment” (➝ P.
24~27).
Do not change the port number.
Y
P
O
C
Edit Storage Server
1
In the Storage and Camera Server Summary, select the Storage Servers tab.
4
A list of Storage Servers which have already been added is displayed.
Double-click the Storage Server in
the list.
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
2
Alternatively, select the Storage
Server and click Edit.
This will bring up the Edit Storage
Server dialog.
3
Note
Change the settings and click OK.
You should change the setting of Storage Server in case of the
IP address of Storage Server has been changed.
The Master Storage Server cannot be edited.
4
To save changes, click
Save Changes at the
bottom right-hand corner
of the Camera Summary
window.
Click Discard Changes to
cancel any changes you
have made.
89
Add Storage Server
Delete Storage Server
1
In the Storage and Camera Server Summary, select the Storage Servers tab.
A list of Storage Servers which have already been added is displayed.
2
Click a Storage Server in the list to highlight it and select Delete from the Edit menu.
Alternatively, click a Storage Server to select it, then press the Delete key on your
keyboard.
3
A confirmation dialog will appear. Click Yes.
Click No to cancel deletion.
Y
P
O
C
4
To save changes, click
Save Changes at the
bottom right-hand corner
of the Camera Summary
window.
Click Discard Changes to
cancel any changes you
have made.
Note
90
If a Storage Server is deleted, all Location, Zone, thumbnail
and Layout information for cameras associated with this
Storage Server will be deleted as well.
The Master Storage Server cannot be edited.
Register Camera Server
After preparing for Camera Server registration (i.e., creating a location and zone, and
adding the Storage Server), you should register the Camera Server.
You should register the desired Camera Server on the Storage Server if it has not been
registered yet.
Register the Camera Server (by Search)
After registering the Camera Server, you can select the Camera Server from the Viewer
screen.
Tip
Y
P
O
C
Up to 192 Camera Servers can be operated. Up to 4 camera
servers can be operated with VK-Lite.
To connect to the Camera Server managed by another Storage
Server, you should first add that Storage Server (➝ P. 88).
Display the Storage and Camera Server Summary Windows
●
Find the Camera Server
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
●
4
Launch the VK Viewer and display the Storage and Camera Server Summary window.
In the Camera Summary window, click
Find Camera Servers which is located
above the right-hand panel.
91
Register Camera Server
The Search Results dialog appears and a list of detected Camera Servers will be
displayed.
Note
Tip
92
Y
P
O
C
When you initiate the Find Camera Servers function, PC
searches the Viewer’s local subnet for all Camera Servers
connected to it. Camera Servers on another subnet cannot be
searched and should be added using Add Camera Servers
(➝P. 93).
The camera names in the list are those specified by the
Camera Server. Refer to the Camera Server’s User’s Manual
for more information on setting the name (“Camera Name” for
VB-C60, VB-C50i/ VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi and VBC10/VB-C10R, “Device Name” for VB150, “VB-C300NA” or
“VB-C300PA” for VB-C300).
If you cannot find the Camera Server, click Add Camera Server
to add it.
For the Camera Servers which have already been registered,
“Registered” is displayed in the “Register” column. The
“Register” columns for unregistered Camera Servers are
blank.
Register Camera Server
●
Add the Camera Server
1
2
In the Search Results
dialog, click a Camera Server
in the search results list to
select it.
Click Add Camera Server.
The Add Camera Server
dialog appears.
Y
P
O
C
Alternatively, double-click an
item to bring up the Add
Camera Server dialog.
4
Continue settings on the Add
Camera Server dialog.
Tip
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Note
Recording schedules should be set in order to record video.
Even though you click OK, video recording will not start
immediately.
Contents of the Add Camera Server dialog will be different
depending on the type of connected Camera Server.
93
Register Camera Server
●
Connect to Camera
1
2
Enter the Host Name or IP address
in Host Name or IP, then enter the
port number for the Camera Server
in Port.
The Host Name or IP should be
255 characters or less (each label,
separated by a period, must be 63
characters or less), the IP address
must be 15 characters or less
(each label, separated by a period,
must be 3 characters or less), and
the Port must be a figure within
the range from 1 to 65535.
Y
P
O
C
Enter the user name and password to connect to the Camera Server. Enter the user
name in User Name and password in Password.
The settings are then saved to the Storage Server.
Note
3
Click Connect.
Once the Viewer has connected with the Camera Server, a tab is shown next to the
Add Camera Server dialog.
Note
94
Use the user name and password configured on the Camera
Server. If the user name and password are not sure, ask for
the System Administrator of the Camera Server.
Storage servers and VK viewers do not support IPv6.
You must click Connect before clicking OK to close the dialog
(the OK button is disabled until you do so).
When two or more cameras are used with VB150 (when “Video
Input” is set to “Single”), two through four tabs are added. The
number of tabs shown for a VB150 does not indicate the
physical number of cameras connected, but indicates the
number of cameras which have been enabled using the VB150
Camera and Video Settings Page. Please refer to Chapter 3, P. 36
of the VB150 User’s Manual for more details.
If “Video Input” is set to “Single” for VB150, the camera name
displayed as the Camera Server Name is the first camera name in
the server’s camera name list when “Use Camera” is selected on
the Camera and Video Settings Page. Therefore, it is recommended
that the Administrator should set the first camera name to be a
general name, applicable to the entire Camera Server.
If you are using a VB150 with the “Settings Web page URL” other
than the default setting “admin”, a connection error occurs when
you click Connect. Restore the default setting and try again.
Register Camera Server
Tip
●
If you have a Multi-Terminal Module VB-EX50 unit plugged into a
VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi and have configured the
“Use External Video Input”, video seen in the Viewer may be
taken from cameras connected to the Multi-Terminal Module.
Switch the video at the Admin Viewer as required.
Select a Storage Server
1
Select a Storage Server from the
drop-down menu which lists preconfigured Storage Servers and
enter the Host Name or IP
address in Host Name or IP and
Port number in Port.
Y
P
O
C
4
2
If you do not want the Camera Server to record video, select Do not record from
the drop-down menu of Storage Server.
Note
●
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
The Host Name or IP must be
255 characters or less (each label,
separated by a period, must be 63
characters or less) and the Port
number must be a figure within the
range from 1 to 65535.
Recording schedules should be set in order to record video.
There is a maximum number of 64 Camera Servers that can be
registered on one Storage Server with VK-64 (or 16 cameras
with Network Video Recorder VK-16).
If you are using the Viewer only, the Storage Server cannot be
configured.
If you have changed the Camera Server’s IP address, you also
need to change the host names in the Connection Settings
and Storage Server Settings dialogs.
Configure Recording Stream Usage (VB-C60)
VB-C60 has a video recording stream
function that temporarily saves images in
the camera memory as a function to
handle packets dropped due to network
interruptions, etc.
To use the recording streams, select
the Use the stream for recording
checkbox.
95
Register Camera Server
Note
●
The recording streams can only be used for JPEG recording at
10 fps or less. They cannot be used for JPEG recording at
rates higher than 10 fps or for MPEG-4 recording.
The recording streams cannot accept requests from multiple
Storage Server.
If recording stream requests are made to one VB-C60 from
multiple clients, the second and subsequent requests return
errors and connect in normal mode.
The recording stream supports network interruption due to the
video-size, image quality, and frame rate.
Y
P
O
C
Configure External Device Input
To switch On or Off the external device
input, check the Invert the state of the
following external option.
One or more inputs may be shown depending
on the type of the Camera Server. It is not
necessary to change this setting if it is not
required.
●
Assign a location and zone
1
2
Note
96
If multiple Cam tabs are shown to the
right of the screen, select a tab for
the Camera Server to edit settings.
Change the name of the Camera
Server in the Camera Name field as
required.
Enter the Camera Name in up to 15 characters.
Changing the Camera Name setting here does not change the
camera name of the Camera Server.
Register Camera Server
3
4
In the Location field, select a location for the Camera Server from the drop-down
menu.
In the Zone field, select a zone for the Camera Server from the drop-down menu.
If necessary, click Add to add another Location or Zone.
The Add Location or Add Zone
dialog opens.
Enter the Location Name or Zone
Name and click OK.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
When you add a Zone in the Add
Zone dialog, you should also add it
to a Location in the same dialog.
Select a location from the dropdown menu.
Refer to P. 86 for how to add locations and zones.
●
Update or Set the Viewer Thumbnails
1
2
In the Preview area, click Update to
recapture an image used for the
thumbnail of the Viewer screen.
To change the camera angle or zoom
magnification by using the mouse,
click Start Control.
97
Register Camera Server
Move the mouse cursor around the image. Arrows
will appear and you can click and drag the cursor in
that direction. The preview will change accordingly.
When you move the mouse cursor to the center of
the image, a zoom in or zoom out control will
appear.
Hold down the mouse on “+” to zoom in.
Hold down the mouse on “-” to zoom out.
Note
Tip
3
Presets should be configured in advance. Please refer to the
Camera Server User’s Manual for details on setting camera
presets.
Select the drive to save video data
In the Drive drop-down menu, select a hard
disk drive on the Storage Server.
Note
98
Y
P
O
C
If you want to change the thumbnail and the preview area is blank
(and the Update and Start Control buttons are disabled), click
Connect (located in the Connection Settings field).
Select a pre-defined camera position (if already configured) from the Preset Angle
drop-down menu.
Tip
●
When using a VB-C50FSi and VB-C50Fi, pan and tilt operation
is not available.
If a fixed camera or an external camera such as VC-C50i is
connected to VB-C50i, you cannot use pan, tilt, and zoom
operations.
Network drives registered via Storage Server Configuration
are also shown on the Drive drop-down menu. Refer to “Select
Disk Drive Settings” (➝ P. 58) for the details.
If you are using the Viewer only, the drive cannot be configured.
Register Camera Server
●
Close the Add Camera Server Dialog
Click OK to close the Add Camera Server dialog.
If you open the Add Camera Server dialog from the Search Results screen, you will
return to the Search Results screen.
In this case, click Cancel to return to the Camera Summary window.
If you clicked Add Camera Server to open the Add Camera Server dialog, you will return
to the Camera Summary window.
●
Y
P
O
C
Save Settings
To save Camera Server settings, click Save Changes at the bottom right-hand corner of
the Camera Summary window.
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
The bottom right-hand corner of
the Camera Summary window
consists of two buttons, Save
Changes and Discard
Changes.
Click Discard Changes to cancel any changes you have made.
●
Return to the Viewer Screen
If you wish to return to the Viewer Screen, select Viewer Screen from the View menu bar.
99
Register Camera Server
Edit Camera Server
The right-hand portion of the Camera Summary window features Edit Camera Server
for Editing the Camera Server(s) on your system, regardless of which tab you have
selected (Storage Servers or Locations/Zones). The same dialog as Add Camera
Server (➝ P. 93) appears.
●
Start Editing Camera Server
1
In the Camera Server list,
click a Camera Server to
highlight it.
Y
P
O
C
2
Click Edit Camera Server.
The Edit Camera Server
dialog appears. This dialog
is identical to the Add
Camera Server dialog (you
can also open the dialog by
double-clicking the menu).
●
Change the Camera Server’s Settings
Change the Camera Server settings as directed in P. 91 through P. 94.
100
Register Camera Server
●
Finish Editing
Click OK when finished.
The Camera Summary window reappears.
●
Save Edit Contents
To save edited Camera Server settings, click Save Changes at the bottom right-hand
corner of the Camera Summary window.
Y
P
O
C
4
Click Discard Changes to cancel any modifications you have made.
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
101
Register Camera Server
Delete Camera Server
The right-hand portion of the Camera Summary window features Remove Camera
Server for removing the Camera Server(s) from your system, regardless of which tab you
have selected (Storage Servers or Locations/Zones).
●
Delete a Camera Server
1
In the Camera Server list,
click a Camera Server to
highlight it.
Y
P
O
C
2
3
Click Remove Camera
Server (you can also press
the Delete key on your
keyboard).
A confirmation dialog will
appear. Click Yes.
Click No to cancel deletion.
102
Register Camera Server
●
Reflect Deletion
To reflect Camera Server deletion, click Save Changes at the bottom right-hand corner of
the Camera Summary window.
Click Discard Changes to cancel any modifications you have made.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
103
Overview of Recording Schedule Setting
After you have registered the Camera Server, you can set recording schedules.
Note
If you are using the Viewer only, you cannot set recording
schedules.
Be sure to perform operational tests after setting schedules.
You can record videos by specifying “when” and “what” to record with recording schedule
function.
“When” - Select from the following:
Specified day of the week (Normal Schedule)
Y
P
O
C
Specific day (Special Day Schedule)
Tip
Use a Normal Schedule for normal recording operation.
Refer to P. 109 for how to use the Normal Schedule dialog.
Example of Normal Schedule: Record video from 7:00 A.M.
through 8:30 A.M. on every
Wednesday and Friday.
Refer to P. 142 for how to use the Special Day Schedule
dialog.
Example of Special Day Schedule: Record video during the winter
holidays from December 28
through January 3.
“What” - Select one or more from the following:
Record video throughout the specified period of time (Continuous recording)
Record video by Motion Detection during the specified time period (Motion Detection
recording)
Record video by sensor during the specified time period (Sensor Event recording)
The Motion Detection recording starts recording video when a motion has been detected.
Refer to “Setting Motion Detection Recording” (➝ P. 124) for details.
The Sensor Event recording starts recording video when a sensor input has occurred.
Refer to “Setting Sensor Event Recording” (➝ P. 131) for details.
Only continuous recording is available with VK-Lite.
Note
Tip
104
One recording schedule can have Continuous, Motion Detection,
and Sensor Event recording settings. You can record a Camera
Server continuously at 1 frame per second and, for example, set
recording to increase to 5 frames per second when motion
occurs.
Recording Schedule
Two types of recording schedules are available: Normal Schedule and Special Day
Schedule.
For both types of schedules, you must set the recording schedule for each Camera Server
in the Recording Schedules screen.
●
1
Display the Recording Schedules screen
Launch the VK Viewer and in the Menu Bar, select View ➝ Configuration.
The Configuration and Preferences screen appears.
2
3
Click the Recording Schedules tab to display the Recording Schedules screen.
Y
P
O
C
Click the Normal Schedule tab to display the Normal Schedules screen.
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
105
Recording Schedule
Day of the week
Zone
Location
Y
P
O
C
Zone representing camera
areas in the Location
Click and drag the
horizontal scroll-bar
to the right to view
other schedule days.
106
Camera schedule time bars
Click and drag the
vertical scroll-bar
downward to view
any other zones.
Recording Schedule
4
VK-64/16
Click the Special Day Schedule tab to display the Special Day Schedule screen.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
107
Recording Schedule
Storage Server selector
Single day schedule area (24 hours)
Y
P
O
C
Location
Zone representing camera
areas in the Location
Schedule Type selector
Day selector
Click and drag the
scroll-bar(s) to view more
schedules if necessary.
Note
108
The scheduling area functions the same as the Normal
Recording Schedule but only covers a single day (from 00:00
hrs. to 24:00 hrs). To have a special day schedule run over a
long weekend (Fri, Sat & Sun), all dates of three days must be
added to the list of days to use the schedule.
When Special Day Schedules are running, Normal Schedules
are disabled. If an invalid schedule exists, the following
warning message will be displayed. “There is a camera with
no recording schedule. Are you sure to save the settings?”
Set Normal Schedule
The Normal Schedule consists of:
Storage Server list - Select the Storage Server to edit the recording schedule.
When the Recording Schedules window first appears, the first Storage Server in the
list is shown with its associated schedule to the right.
Schedule Area - Set up standard day-to-day recording schedules settings.
Storage Server selector
Schedule Area
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
109
Set Normal Schedule
Create Normal Schedule
●
1
Display the Recording Schedule screen
In the Menu Bar, select View ➝ Configuration.
The Configuration and Preferences screen appears.
2
3
●
Click the Recording Schedules tab to display the Recording Schedules screen.
Click the Normal Schedule tab to display the Normal Schedule screen.
Y
P
O
C
Change the Storage Server
If you wish to display another Storage
Server’s schedule, click the Storage Server
menu, otherwise proceed to the next step.
The menu may list more assigned Storage Servers. If you select another Storage Server,
the Schedule Area will refresh and associated schedule zones will be shown.
●
Create a Normal Schedule
Click and drag a time period for a camera
name and release the mouse button. The
Add Schedule Item Camera dialog is
displayed.
Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the
Schedule Area alongside a camera name
and click Add Schedule from the context
menu.
110
Set Normal Schedule
You can click and drag the schedule area of several
cameras to bring up the Add Schedule Item - multiple
cameras dialog. This allows you to easily set schedules for
multiple cameras. Once created, settings for each camera
can be customized later.
Note
The shortest recording time for a schedule is 15 minutes.
You cannot create overlapped schedule items within a single
Camera Sever.
Y
P
O
C
4
Set start and end times and the day of the
week (➝ P. 112).
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Set frame rate, enable Motion Detection
and sensor event recording (➝ P. 113).
Selec to record audio (➝ P. 113).
Set the preset camera angle and exposure
compensation (➝ P. 114).
Move the mouse cursor in the Preview
area to change the camera angle
(➝ P. 98).
Control the camera via the Camera
Control Panel (➝ P. 195).
The Top page of the Camera Server is
displayed after Internet Explorer launches.
Set the Night Mode, Resolution and
Options (➝ P. 116).
Configuration is discussed on the following pages.
Set the external device output
(➝ P. 117).
* The number of external devices
available for setting depends on the
type of the Camera Server.
111
Set Normal Schedule
●
Set the recording period
Click the hours or minutes fields to
select, then click the up/down
arrows or directly enter a value to
change time.
Tip
●
Y
P
O
C
Select a day of the week to record video
In the Repeat on area, check the
days you wish to repeat the
recording period you have set in the
Times area above.
Note
112
Time period could be set for overnight recording such as
‘Start 22:00 to End 08:00’.
Click All Day if you want 24 hour recording. The Start and End
times will be set at 00:00 respectively.
If you have defined any special day schedules, at that time the
schedules will override normal schedule times for the whole
day.
Times are given in 24 hours
If Camera Server has been configured with Restrict Service
Time, VK-64/VK-16 will not be able to record from the Camera
Server during restricted times.
The time zone used for the recording schedule will be the time
of PC where the Storage Server is running.
The Storage Server will adjust for Daylight Savings if
configured in the operating system.
Set Normal Schedule
●
Set Continuous Recording
1
2
Click the Continuously at
Max. box if you want to set
continuous recording for the
duration of the time period.
Select a frame rate for recorded video from the drop-down menu, or input a value
from the keyboard.
You can set the frame rate from 0.1 frames per second to 30 frames per second.
The default is 5 frames par seconds. The upper limit is 5 frames per second with
VK-Lite.
Y
P
O
C
Refer to P. 123 for details of Continuous Recording.
Configure Motion Detection Recording and Sensor Recording Settings
1
2
3
4
VK-64/16
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
●
Check the On motion
detection box if you want
recording activated when
motion is detected during this
time period.
Check the On sensor event box if you want recording activated from a sensor
event during this time period.
Click Settings to change the details.
Refer to P. 124 and P. 131 for details of Motion Detection and Sensor Event
recordings.
●
Configure Audio Recording
If you want to record audio when video
recording mode is set, select the Audio
recording checkbox.
Audio-only recording is not available, so
Audio recording should be set as an
addition to video recording.
113
Set Normal Schedule
Note
●
Audio recording is available on camera servers that support
audio transmission function (VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50i, VBC50iR, VB-C50FSi). On camera servers that do not support the
function, the Audio recording checkbox is disabled.
Audio recording is enabled when video recording mode is on.
It is not possible to setup schedules that only record audio
without recording video.
When the resolution (➝P.117) is set to JPEG, recorded video
and the audio are synchronized. However, the synchronization
is not guaranteed.
Live video and audio are not synchronized.
Audio is recorded at 8 KB/s. The communication volume is 64
kbps.
After Audio recording is enabled, related indications are
changed to show that, such as "Record + Sensor (Audio)", in
the Configuration and Preferences screen > Camera Summery
tub (➝P.82), and the Configuration and Preferences screen >
the Recording Schedules tub (➝P.105).
The timeline on the Viewer screen (➝P.204) does not show
whether audio recording is enabled or not.
Audio recording via a proxy server is not supported.
Y
P
O
C
Set the Preset Camera Angle and Exposure Compensation
1
In the Preview field a live preview is
given of the selected camera view
when connected.
Select a Preset camera position from
the drop-down menu of available
camera angles, to retain a live preview
from that angle.
Alternatively, move your mouse pointer
in the Preview area to display controls
and clicking to pan, tilt and zoom (➝ P.
98).
2
Check Preset Tour to move among multiple preset positions sequentially (VB-C60,
VB-C300, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR only). Click Settings to specify the order to switch
among presets.
Refer to P. 138 for how to set the Preset Tour.
3
114
Select On or Off from the Exposure Compensation drop-down menu (You can set
the exposure compensation to High, Medium, Low or Off for VB-C300, VBC50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi and VB-C50Fi. On VB-C60, the options include: 0, +1,
+2, +3, -3, -2, -1).
Set Normal Schedule
Select Not Specified accepts the current exposure settings configured by the
Camera Server.
Note
Camera angle can be changed by moving your mouse pointer
in the Preview area to display controls. By clicking, pan, tilt
and zoom function can be controlled (➝ P. 98).
After the camera server control finishes, the Preset is set to
Custom, and the current setting values of exposure
compensation and the camera server position are used for
recording.
If you select Not Specified for preset, Storage Server records
video the Camera Server currently displays. However if
camera angle is changed from the Viewer, the video will be
recorded at the changed position of the Camera Server.
In the following cases, the Storage Server records whatever
the Camera Server currently displays;
- Multiple number of cameras are connected to VB150 with the
Video Input set to Single.
- VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi with an external
camera connected and have configured the “Use External
Video Input”.
During initializing the camera head position of VB-C50i/VBC50iR, VB-C300 or VB-C60, the camera head moves to face
front, and then moves back to the current position. Please
note that video will be recorded in the meantime cotinuously.
The On Motion Detection, Exposure compensation, and
additional options are not available, if you use the Preset Tour
function.
If you use the Camera Control Panel to do the pan, tilt, or
zoom operation, the value in the Preset drop-down menu will
changed to Custom.
Preset used for the Preset Tour are created on the Camera
Server. Please refer to the Camera Server User’s Manual for
details on making camera presets.
Although the VB-C300 does not allow Preset Tour on the
Camera Server, the Preset Tour is available via this setting.
If Continuous is set, Exposure Compensation is not available.
If Exposure is set, the Exposure Compensation option is set to
Not Specified.
With VB-C60, when the optical zoom exceeds the threshold
and shifted to digital zoom, Custom in the Preset pull-down
menu is not available. Even if you click OK in the Add/Edit
Schedule Item dialog or the Sensor Event Settings dialog, an
error message will appear and the settings will not be applied.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
115
Set Normal Schedule
●
Set the Night Mode and Resolution (VB-C60, VB-C300, VBC50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi and VB150)
1
Note
Tip
2
Select the Night Mode from the
drop-down menu. You can select
from Not specified, Disabled,
Enable, and Auto.
If you select Enabled, the Night Mode status will be back to
Disabled after the configured recording schedule finishes.
A higher resolution results in larger disk usage. Make sure
you have enough disk space.
If you set Night Mode to “Auto”, please make sure that
Exposure mode is set to “Auto” on the Camera Control Panel.
You can select from Not Specified, Disable, Enable, and Auto
(for VB-C300 and VB-C60 only) for VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50i
series, and VB150.
Video turns to monochrome in the Night Mode.
If you specify Auto, you cannot control the Night Mode using
the Camera Control Panel.
You cannot use the built-in infrared lamp if you are using the
optional dome housing.
Y
P
O
C
In the Night Mode, set to Enable. After the schedule expires,
the Night Mode will be disabled.
In the Auto mode, the mode automatically switches according
to the brightness.
Select a resolution for recording from the drop-down menu. You can select from
JPEG Small, JPEG Medium, JPEG Large, MPEG-4 or Not specified.
If you select Not specified, the Storage Server does not attempt to change the
setting, rather it accepts whatever Night Mode setting and resolution the Camera
Server offers.
MPEG-4 can be selected for VB-C60.
Note
116
Set Normal Schedule
Tip
The actual image size in relation to the specified resolution size
is as follows.
JPEG Small
160 x 120
JPEG Medium
320 x 240
JPEG Large
640 x 240 (VB150 only)
640 x 480
MPEG-4
the size specified in the setting page (VB-C60 only)
Not specified
the size that has been specified in the setting page
at the time of starting recording (VB-C60 only)
Y
P
O
C
the size specified in the setting page
To enable the Exposure, White
Balance, Smart Shade Control (SSC),
and/or Focus on the Camera Control
Panel, check the each check box.
Note
●
The additonal option is available with VB-C60/VB-C300. Other
models cannot use these options. S Shade Ctl. only available
with the VB-C60.
If the Exposure box is checked, the Exposure Compensation
option will be disabled.
If Preset Tour is enabled, you cannot use additional options.
The additional option settings will be return to the original
settings if the Camera Server settings are changed during
schedule execution.
Set External Device Output
1
2
4
Set Additional Options
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
●
Click External Outputs Setting
to control any external devices
that may be connected to your
Camera Server.
Click Setup to change the details of external outputs. If you do not change the
settings, the defaults will be used.
117
Set Normal Schedule
3
Tip
●
If Setup is clicked, click the drop-down
menu for the target external device and
set External Outputs to On or Not
specified on the External Outputs
Setting dialog.
For VB-C300, only one target external device can be configured
on the External Outputs Settings dialog.
Y
P
O
C
Finish Setting
Click OK to save the new settings and close the dialog.
Click Cancel to discard the new settings.
When you click OK, the Preset and Exposure Compensation settings are effective on
Video Windows in the Viewer. Control the camera as required by clicking Camera Control.
●
1
Save Schedules
To save the Normal Schedule, click Save Schedule at the bottom right-hand corner
of the Normal Schedule window.
Click Discard Changes to cancel any modifications you have made.
2
If you wish to return to the Viewer, select Viewer Screen from the View menu bar.
Note
118
Camera Servers have feature to record videos on memory of the
camera with sensor input or schedule. If settings are enabled on
the Camera Server, they take precedence over any settings made
in VK-64/VK-16. This may cause some confusion if your VK64/VK-16 recording schedules fail to record with the correct
camera preset. You should disable such Camera Server features
if you wish VK-64/VK-16 settings to take precedence.
Change Camera Server Settings
Click Set-up in the Add/Edit Schedule Item dialog, and then Camera Server's top page
appears after Internet Explorer launches (VB-C60).
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Click Setting Page to display the Setting Page to change Camera Server settings.
119
Change Camera Server Settings
Items related to recording schedule setting are as follows. Refer to the Camera Server's
manual for details.
●
User Name and Password
●
Motion detection recording
Set the user name and password for the Camera Server. You cannot set them with
VK-64/VK-16.
Y
P
O
C
If the Camera Server is VB-C60, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi, or VB150,
you can configure the Motion Detection settings on the Camera Server.
To configure the Motion Detection settings on VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VBC50Fi, or VB150, use the VB Administration Tools supplied with the Camera Server.
For VB150 (“Video Input” should be set to “Single”), the Motion Detection settings are
configured using the VK-64/VK-16 Motion Detection Settings dialog (➝ P. 125).
The Motion Detection function is not suitable for conditions where high reliability is
required. It is not recommend using this function in situations where high reliability is
required, such as for monitoring purposes. Canon accepts no liability whatsoever for
faults, etc. resulting from the use of the Motion Detection.
●
Image/Video Quality
●
Camera Name
You can set the image/video quality. The Motion Detection settings may be affected by
the video quality setting of the Camera Server. When changing the video quality on the
Camera Server, be sure to check the settings for Motion Detection.
Set the name of the camera displayed in the Camera Server list. You cannot set them
with VK-64/VK-16.
120
Change Camera Server Settings
●
Preset
Presets should be set on the Camera Server in advance. You cannot set them with
VK-64/VK-16.
If the recording settings using a preset are used on the Camera Server, the preset
position will override camera positions set by VK-64/VK-16, including those in recording
schedules and Camera Server position. The camera control will be lost when starting to
control the camera at the Camera Server.
If predefined presets are not shown in the Preset drop-down menu even though they
have been defined on the Camera Server, click Camera Control to display the Camera
Control Panel, obtain camera control, then configure the settings again.
Y
P
O
C
●
Restrict Service Time
●
External Device
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
If a Camera Server has been configured with Restrict Service Time enabled,
VK-64/VK-16 will be able to record from the Camera Server during restricted times.
Specify the name of the external device, such as sensor name. You cannot configure it
with VK-64/VK-16.
If the external device is not set on the Camera Server, VK-64/VK-16 cannot configure it.
●
Sensor Input, Recording to Camera Memory
Camera Servers have certain features to capture image into its memory based on
sensor input or schedule. If settings are enabled on the Camera Server, those settings
take precedence.
121
Batch-Setting Schedules
When you set schedule, you can set multiple schedules at one time.
●
Create Multiple Camera Schedules
You can click and drag schedule area covering several cameras to bring up the Add
Schedule Item - multiple cameras dialog. This allows you to easily set recording
schedules for multiple cameras. Once created, settings for each camera can be
customized.
Y
P
O
C
Example : Drag over the Schedule area covering three Camera Servers to set the same
schedule for the three Camera Servers.
●
Change or Move Multiple Camera Server Schedules
While holding down the Ctrl key, click on individual schedule items to select them, and
then drag the mouse to change or move multiple recording schedules.
122
Set Continuous Recording
You can set Continuous Recording with the frame rate of 0.1 to 30 frames per second
when creating a Normal Schedule or Special Day Schedule (The upper limit is 5 fps with
VK-Lite).
Specify the number of still images to record every second from the fps drop-down menu.
Higher fps value generates smooth video, however, the load on the Storage Server or
network goes higher. Video data quantity also increases to consume hard disk space.
To configure the Camera Server for recording:
●
Y
P
O
C
Set Recording Mode
1
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
2
Check the Continuously at
Max. check box if you want
to set continuous recording
for the time period.
Select a frame rate for recorded video from the drop-down menu, or input a value
from the keyboard.
You can set the frame rate from 0.1 to 30 frames per second. The default setting is
5 seconds.
Note
When the load on Storage Server CPU and hard disk is higher,
recording at the specified frame rate may not be available, or
the video recording may be interrupted.
Higher frame rates for result in larger disk usage. Please
ensure that you have enough disk space.
The specified frame rate is the frame rate that the Storage
Server will attempt to record, however may not be the actual
frame rate used for recording video. Factors such as the
number of Viewers, load on the Camera Server and the
Storage Server, and network traffic may reduce the actual
frame rate recorded. Also, the maximum frame rate for a VBC10 configured with a resolution of 640 x 480 is 10 frames per
second, and for a VB150 with 4 cameras is 2 to 3 frames per
second.
While the resolution is set to MEPG-4, the frame rate dropdown menu is gray out. However, the video is recorded at the
frame rate specified in the VB-C60 setting page at that point.
123
Set Motion Detection Recording
VK-64/16
Set Motion Detection Recording Settings
The Motion Detection recording starts when a motion has been detected.
Configure the Motion Detection recording settings in the Motion Detection Settings
window which appears when you click Settings.
Some items in the Motion Detection Settings window overlap with the items in the
Add/Edit Schedule Item dialog. In Motion Detection recording, the settings in the Motion
Detection Settings window take precedence. Preset and Exposure Compensation
settings in the Add/Edit Schedule dialog are applied to the Motion Detection recording.
Note
Y
P
O
C
The Motion Detection function is not suitable for conditions
where high reliability is required. It is not recommend using
this function in situations where high reliability is required,
such as for monitoring purposes. Canon accepts no liability
whatsoever for faults, etc. resulting from the use of the Motion
Detection.
Motion detection is performed by the Storage Server or
Camera Server (whichever selected in the Motion Detection
Settings window). If the Camera Server executes motion
detection, motion detection is not available while the Camera
Server is performing the pan, tilt, or zoom operation (motion
detection by the Storage Server is available during these
operations).
If the recording schedule expires during Motion Detection
recording, the Motion Detection recording also terminates.
Edit Motion Detection Recording Settings
You can specify the detection area and the amount of sensitivity for Motion Detection
Recording. The area for detection can also be modified which is ideal, for example, if the
field of view has two entrances and you wish to monitor motion for one entrance.
124
Set Motion Detection Recording
●
Step 1: Click Settings next to On Motion Detection
The Motion Detection Settings
dialog appears (The dialog for VBC60 is shown below).
Click to activate Motion Detection on the
Camera Server for VB-C60, VB-C50i/VBC50iR, VB-C50FSi and VB-C50Fi.
Select sensitivity
options.
Click and drag a
control point to
re-size the active
region.
Motion detection
level indicator
will increase
during activity.
Note
Set a priority for events
triggered by motion.
Y
P
O
C
Select frame rate and pre/post event duration for
recording triggered by motion.
4
Activate external
device output.
This dialog box is only valid when connected to VB-C60,
Detect Motion Using is set to Camera Server and Part
detective region is checked. On VB-C60, recording settings
can be configured separately on each of the four detection
regions (tabs).
If Detect Motion Using is set to Storage Server, or you are
connected to a different camera, or Part detective region is not
checked, the video recording settings apply to the entire
region.
If the Sensor Event recording is also enabled and motion
detection and sensor input occur simultaneously, the Sensor
Event recording takes precedence. Refer to “Priorities of
Motion Detection and Sensor Event Recording” (➝P. 137) for
details.
You cannot use the Preset Tour and the Motion Detection
recording together.
125
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Detail settings
are available for
the sensitivity,
area ratio, and
duration.
Allow to divide the detection area
into 4 and to set for recording for
each divided detection area.
Set Motion Detection Recording
●
Step 2: Set Motion Detection Options
Set the following options on the Motion Detection Settings dialog.
1
In the Detect Motion Using menu, select
one of the following:
Storage Server
Obtains video from the Camera Server and
detects motion with the Storage Server.
Camera Server
Uses the Motion Detection function of the
Camera Server to detect motion (This
menu is only active for VB150 servers with
the Video Input set to Single or VB-C60,
VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VBC50Fi).
2
Y
P
O
C
In the Analysis Frame Rate menu, select from 0.1 to 30 frames per second.
If you select the Camera Sever to detect motion, Settings becomes available. Settings is
now enabled. Click to launch your VB Admin Motion Detection Setting Tool. Install the VB
Admin Tools that is bundled with the VB-C60, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, and VBC50Fi in advance. Refer to the Camera Server’s User’s Manual for how to configure the
motion detection settings.
Note
126
To use the Motion Detection function of the VB-C50i/VB-C50iR,
VB-C50FSi and VB-C50Fi, it is necessary to configure
schedules from the “VB Admin Schedule Setting Tool”.
Setting motion detection at the Storage Server causes high
CPU load. It is strongly recommended to set motion detection
at the Camera Server whenever it has the motion detection
function.
Detect Motion Using cannot be set to Storage Server when the
resolution is set to MPEG-4.
Set Motion Detection Recording
●
Step 3: Set the active region for recording
In the Active Region field, adjust the region where
motion detection is triggered. By default, the
Active Region is the full area. In addition you
cannot use pan, tilt, and zoom operations in this
window.
1
Click one of the corner or edge handles and
hold down the mouse button.
Y
P
O
C
2
Drag the handle to change the motiontrigger boundary (dotted frame).
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
The Motion Detection Options field also allows you to set the sensitivity for Motion
Detection within the Active Region. Sensitivity and Area Ratio are set by using the two
sliding bars.
Motion detection status can be confirmed by the Detection Indicator during operation.
Area Ratio slide bar.
Area Ratio marker.
Detection Indicator Colors
Motion is displayed in the Detection Indicator as a green color bar and will remain green if the
level of motion is below the configured Sensitivity and within a defined Area Ratio. If motion
reaches the set Sensitivity and Area Ratio, the color bar changes to yellow and if the
detected motion remains at the yellow level for the specified duration period, a red color bar is
displayed and an event is triggered. The behavior of the Detection Indicator is described as
follows.
Green color bar - Changed area is less than the specified Area
Ratio, i.e., activity remains at the left of the Area Ratio marker.
Area Ratio marker.
127
Set Motion Detection Recording
Area Ratio marker.
Yellow color bar - Changed area is equal to or greater than the
specified Area Ratio (activity peaks on or to the right of the Area
Ratio Marker) but the required cotinuance of motion has not met
the specified duration in order to trigger an event.
Area Ratio marker.
Red color bar - The amount of change that meets the defined
detection conditions and motion is detected, triggering an event,
i.e., the required amount of motion has been detected for the
specified duration.
●
Set the Sensitivity
Y
P
O
C
Sensitivity is the degree of change which is detected as motion.
Drag the slide bar to adjust Sensitivity
to the required value. Can be specified
in increments of 10 from 1 to 250.
Tip
●
The sensitivity can be set to Low - Med or Med - High. To set,
check the Detail Settings checkbox and click the Settings button.
When the Detail Settings dialog box is displayed, click Low - Med
to set the sensitivity in the range of 1 to 128, or Med - High to set
in the range of 129 to 256.
Set the Area Ratio
Area Ratio is the degree of change of area (ratio against the defined detection area)
detected as motion.
Click and drag the Area Ratio slide bar to
any position from 0% to 100%. This
establishes the proportion of image inside the
Active Region (dotted frame) allowed before
motion is detected.
When you drag the slide bar, the black vertical line in the Detection
Indicator will move to reflect the change in specified Area Ratio.
Area Ratio marker.
Tip
128
Although the duration for recognizing motion is fixed at 0.2
seconds, this can also be changed if neccesary. To change this
setting, select the Detail Settings checkbox and click the Settings
button. The Detail Settings dialog box is displayed, and the value
can be change in the range of 0.0 to 5.0 seconds.
Set Motion Detection Recording
●
Step 4: Set the Detection Regions (VB-C60)
1
2
Tip
Y
P
O
C
This operation is not necessary if you want configure the
recording settings over the entire region without partitioning the
detection regions.
4
Step 5: Set the event priority status
In the Priority field, select the priority for the
event to be generated for this motion from a
menu of five options, ranging from 1. Highest
to 5. Lowest. Priorities are color-coded in the
Tip
●
Check the Record on this settings
checkbox on the recording settings tab.
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
●
If you want to partition the detection
region for notifications, check area the
Notice events with the area name
when motions are detected
checkbox.
When the same priority level is set to multiple detection areas,
the schedule is executed in the order of Area 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Step 6: Set frame rate and pre and post event recording duration
1
Max. Frame Rate - select a maximum
frame rate for recorded video from the
drop-down menu. Choose from 0.1
frames per second to 30 frames per
second (5 is the default).
129
Set Motion Detection Recording
2
Record before event - enter a number of seconds for the amount of recording time
before the event occurs (up to 30 seconds).
Note
3
●
If Continuous is also set, Record for before event is not
available.
If Record for before event is set, it will take approximately 10
seconds after event occurrence until its display in the viewer.
If the resolution is set to MPEG-4, the frame rate set in the VBC60 becomes enabled.
Y
P
O
C
Record after event - enter a number of seconds for the amount of recording time
after the event occurs (up to 999 seconds).
Step 7: Set the External Outputs
Click the drop-down menu for the
target external device and set On or
Not specified.
Available external outputs depend on the Camera Server.
Note
Click OK to save the new settings and close the dialog.
Click Cancel to discard the new settings.
Note
Tip
130
Even though the before event and after event fields are set to 0
seconds, video will still be recorded while motion is detected.
Refer to the Chapter 6 for optimizing the Motion Detection
operation.
Set Sensor Event Recording
VK-64/16
Set Sensor Event Recording Settings
The Sensor Event recording starts when a sensor input has occurred.
Configure the Sensor Event recording settings in the Sensor Event Settings window
which appears when you click Settings.
Some items in the Sensor Event Settings window overlap with the items in the Add/Edit
Schedule Item dialog. When the Sensor Event recording is executed, the settings in the
Sensor Event Settings window take precedence.
Note
Tip
If the recording schedule expires during Sensor Event recording,
the Sensor Event recording also terminates.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
If using a VB150 with multiple cameras and “Video Input” is also
specified, you can configure different Sensor Event recording
settings for each camera (or you can specify “Do not record”).
131
Set Sensor Event Recording
Edit Sensor Event Recording Settings
You can specify recording settings based on the occurrence of a sensor event. A number
of tabs in the Sensor Event Settings dialog are shown to reflect the number of sensors
on each camera. You can modify the recording settings for each sensor.
●
Step 1: Next to On sensor event, click Settings
The Sensor Event Settings dialog
appears.
Click a tab to modify
that sensor’s settings.
The sensor name
displayed is the name
set by the Camera
Server.
Y
P
O
C
Night Mode is available
for VB-C60, VB-C300,
VB-C50i/VB-C50iR,
VB-C50FSi and VBC50Fi Camera Servers
or VC-C50i/VC-C50iR
cameras connected to
Camera Server
VB150s. Click Night
mode and select
Disabled, Enabled, IR
light off or Enabled, IR
light on from the submenu.
Control the camera via
the Camera Control
Panel. Refer to the
Viewer Manual for the
information about the
Camera Control Panel.
The Top page of the
Camera Server is
displayed after
Internet Explorer
launches.
Set whether or not to
use additional options
(Exposure, White
Balance, Shade
Control, and Focus).
You can set External
Outputs to On or Not
specified when a
sensor event occurs.
Note
132
Frequent sensor events result in high CPU load on the Storage
Server. If you have 10 or more sensor events per minute
continuously, it is recommended that you should set
continuous recording.
If setting Night Mode on VB-C50iR, IR cut filter will be inactive.
It will not turn on the built-in IR light. To turn on the IR light,
perform the operation from the Video Window menu.
Set Sensor Event Recording
●
Step 2: Enable recording and set an event priority
1
2
●
Check Record on this sensor
to enable recording when a
sensor is triggered.
In the Priority field, select the
priority for the event to be
generated for this motion from 5
options, ranging from 1. Highest
to 5. Lowest. Priorities are colorcoded as events in the Timeline in
the Viewing Screen.
Y
P
O
C
4
Step 3: Specify a camera angle when the sensor is triggered
Note
Tip
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
In Camera Angle, select a preset
camera angle from the Preset drop-down
menu. When the sensor is triggered, the
camera will be moved to this position.
If you select Not specified, the
camera will not be moved.
The camera angle can also be changed
by moving your mouse pointer in the
Preview area to display controls and
clicking to pan, tilt and zoom (➝ P. 98).
After the camera has been controlled,
the Preset will be set to Custom.
If you set the viewing angle to the preset position of VB-C300
in the digital zoom region, the actual angle may be misaligned
from the set angle.
Camera Servers have functions to record video on memory of
the camera by the sensor input or schedule. If the settings are
enabled on the Camera Server, they take precedence.
Click the Exposure Compensation drop-down menu and select On
to compensate for camera views with strong backlighting. The
setting will be used when the sensor is triggered. This is useful,
for example, if a camera angle would change from an indoor view
to an outdoor view when the sensor is triggered.
133
Set Sensor Event Recording
Tip
●
If you set the Preset option in the Sensor Event Settings window, the
pre-event recording position may be different from the specified position
because the Camera Server moves when a sensor input occurs.
Also, if you specify the post-event recording time to “0”, and the
sensor input occurs for a short period of time, recording may
terminate before the Camera Server reaches the preset position.
If you are using a normal close type sensor, you need to set the
presets with the Camera Server recording screen. Refer to
“Configure External Device Input” (➝ P. 96) for the details.
Y
P
O
C
Step 4: Set the Night Mode (VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR,
VB-C50FSi, and VB-C50Fi)
Select the Night Mode from the dropdown menu. You can select from
Disabled, Enabled, or Not specified.
●
Step 5: Set Additional Options (VB-C60, VB-C300)
To use the Exposure, White Balance,
Shade Control, and/or Focus settings
on the Camera Control Panel, check
the corresponding check box.
Note
●
The additional options are available with VB-C60 and VB-C300
only. S. Shade Control only has an effect on VB-C60.
If Exposure is set, the Exposure Compensation option is set to
Not Specified.
Step 6: Set frame rate and pre and post event recording duration
In the Record Video At field:
1
134
Max. Frame Rate - select a
maximum frame rate for recorded
video from the drop-down menu,
or enter a value from the
keyboard. Choose from 0.1 to 30
frames per second (5 is the
default).
Set Sensor Event Recording
Note
2
Record for before event - enter a number of seconds for the amount of recording
time before the event occurs (up to a maximum of 30 seconds).
Note
Y
P
O
C
4
If Continuous Recording is also set, Record for before event is
not available.
If Record for before event is set, it will take approximately 10
seconds after event occurrence until its display in the viewer.
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
3
The frame rate specified is the frame rate that the Storage
Server will attempt to record, and may not be the actual frame
rate used for recording video. Factors such as the number of
Viewers, the number of Camera Servers used, network traffic
and load on the Camera Server and the Storage Server may
reduce the actual frame rate recorded.
While the resolution is set to MEPG-4, the frame rate dropdown menu is gray out. However, the video is recorded at the
frame rate specified in the VB-C60 setting page at that point.
Record for after event - enter a number of seconds for the amount of recording
time after the event has transpired (up to a maximum of 999 seconds).
Click OK to save the new settings and close the dialog.
Click Cancel to discard the new settings.
Note
If the before and after event fields are set to 0 seconds, video
will still be recorded while the sensor is activated.
Longer pre-event recording will increase memory usage.
Longer pre-event recording with insufficient memory may
greatly reduce performance when the disk-based virtual
memory runs short.
135
Set Sensor Event Recording
●
Step 7: Set the External Outputs
1
2
Click External Outputs
Setting to control any
external devices that may be
connected to your Camera
Server.
Click Setup to change the details of external outputs. Otherwise the default settings
will be applied.
Y
P
O
C
3
If Setup is clicked, click the dropdown menu for the target
external device and set External
Outputs to On or Not specified
on the Control External
Devices dialog.
Available external outputs depend on the Camera Server.
Note
136
Set Sensor Event Recording
●
Priorities of Motion Detection and Sensor Event Recordings
You can specify events priorities for the Motion Detection and Sensor Event recordings,
and if the events occur simultaneously, the recording with the higher priority is performed
first.
When using the Motion Detection and Sensor Event recordings together and motion
detection and sensor input occur simultaneously, the Sensor Event recording takes
precedence.
If two events with the same priority occur, the earlier event takes precedence. When the
earlier event terminates and the later event still remains, the later event will be handled.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
137
Set Preset Tour
Use the Preset Tour function to move among multiple preset positions sequentially.
In the Add/Edit Schedule Item dialog, there are two options available for setting the
Preset Tour function. Procedure to set the Preset Tour function in as follows.
Note
When Preset Tour and MPEG-4 are used together, the video
data size becomes very large.
The durability of camera Pan/Tilt mechanism may be affected
depending on the Preset Tour setting (➝ P. 141).
In the Preset Tour, the camera position returns to the first
preset after the last preset.
When the Preset Tour is used, the Motion Detection recording,
Exposure compensation, and additional options are not
available.
Presets used for Preset Tour are created on the Camera
Server.
Please refer to the Camera Server’s User’s Manual for details
on creating camera presets.
Preset Tour can be used with VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50i, and
VB-C50iR only.
Y
P
O
C
Set Preset Tour
●
Add a Preset
1
Check the Preset Tour box and click
Settings.
The Preset Tour Settings dialog
appears.
2
Click Add.
The Preset Tour (Add) dialog
appears.
3
4
138
Select a preset to add from the
Preset drop-down menu.
For the selected preset, configure the Speed (PT), Speed (Z), and Pause (sec)
settings.
Set Preset Tour
5
Check the settings and click OK.
This returns to the Preset Tour Settings dialog.
●
1
Test the Preset Tour
Check the Preset Tour box and click Settings.
The Preset Tour Settings dialog appears.
2
Click Start Test.
Y
P
O
C
After clicking Start Test, the Preset Tour is executed once and you can confirm the
operation.
1
4
Change the Preset Settings
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
●
Check the Preset Tour box and click Settings.
The Preset Tour Settings dialog appears.
2
Select a preset to change from the
list and click Edit.
The Preset Tour (Edit) dialog
appears.
3
4
For the selected preset, change the Speed (PT), Speed (Z), or Pause (sec)
settings.
Check the settings and click OK.
This returns to the Preset Tour Settings dialog.
Tip
For VB-C300 and VB-C60, you can return the focus to the default
setting by checking the Focus is returned to default when the
camera is operated. option.
139
Set Preset Tour
●
1
Change the Preset Order
Check the Preset Tour box and click Settings.
The Preset Tour Settings dialog appears.
2
●
Select a preset to change the order from the list, and click Move Up or Move Down.
Delete a Preset
1
Check the Preset Tour box and click
Settings.
Y
P
O
C
The Preset Tour Settings dialog
appears.
2
3
Select a preset to delete from the list and click Remove.
Click OK.
This returns to the Preset Tour Settings dialog.
Note
140
When you delete camera server's presets, please be sure to
check presets of VK-64/VK-16
.
Set Preset Tour
Note
If the following warning appears, change the settings according
to the tables below.
Warning example
Y
P
O
C
* The tour time depends on the settings.
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Click Cancel to return to the setting screen.
Click OK to save the current settings.
(If you are using the Preset Setting Tool, click Save on the setting page of the tool)
Endurance of VB-C50i and VB-C300's pan/tilt mechanisms are
approximately 100,000 round trips at the full range. The total tour
time depends on the combination of the movement rate,
movement range, and still time. Refer to the following tables.
Total tour time for 100,000 round trips in the pan direction (estimated).
Movement rate (PT) is 1.
Still time
(sec.)
0
10
20
30
Movement range in the
pan direction (angle)
50
100
150
3872
3825
3809
5666
4722
4407
7555
5666
5037
9444
6611
5666
Movement rate (PT) is 2.
Movement range in the
Still time
pan direction (angle)
(sec.)
50
100
150
0
1983
1936
1920
10
3777
2833
2518
20
5666
3777
3148
30
7555
(Unit: Time)
4722
3777
(Unit: Time)
Example: If the movement rate (PT) is 1, still time is 30 seconds,
and movement range (angle) in the pan direction is 50
degrees, it takes approximately 9,444 hours for 100,000
round trips in the pan direction.
Endurance of VB-C60's pan/tilt mechanism is approximately
300,000 round trips at the full range.
Total tour time for 300,000 round trips in the pan direction (estimated).
Movement rate (PT) is 1.
Still time
(sec.)
0
10
20
30
Movement range in the
pan direction (angle)
±50
±100
±150
11616
11475
11427
17000
14166
13222
22666
17000
15111
28333
19833
17000
(Unit: Time)
Movement rate (PT) is 2.
Still time
(sec.)
0
10
20
30
Movement range in the
pan direction (angle)
±50
±100
±150
5950
5808
5761
11333
8500
7555
17000
11333
9444
22666
14166
11333
(Unit: Time)
141
Set a Special Day Schedule
VK-64/16
Special Day Recording
Special Day Schedule window is used for configuring particular days such as public
holidays. When Special Day Schedules are set, Normal Schedules that conflict with
Special Day Schedules are disabled.
Y
P
O
C
In Configuration and Preferences Screen, click Recording Schedules tab and ensure
Special Day Schedule is selected. Special Day Schedule consists of:
Storage Server - Select Storage Server from the list to add/edit schedules for that
server. Associated Locations and Zones are displayed in the Schedule Area.
Schedule Type - Allows you to select a schedule type. These are user-defined
schedules such as Public Holidays and Long Weekends.
Days list - Allows you to choose a day to use this schedule.
Schedule Area - Covers a single day, 24 hours. Overrides a Normal day schedule.
142
Set a Special Day Schedule
Add, Edit and Delete a Schedule Type
Add Schedule Type dialog allows you to create a name for a new schedule type, for
example, a public holiday. You should create a schedule type first before you can
associate days with it. There is no limit to the number of schedule type that can be added.
To launch the dialog and add a Special Day Schedule.
●
Add Schedule Type
1
Click Add.
The Add Schedule Type dialog appears.
Y
P
O
C
3
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
2
4
Enter name in the Schedule Name
area, for example “Company Holidays”.
Click OK.
The schedule type is added and the
dialog closes.
The new name will appear in the
Schedule Type list.
Note
The scheduling area functions are the same as the Normal
Recording Schedule but only covers a single day (from 00:00
hrs. to 24:00 hrs). To have a special day schedule run over a
long weekend (Fri, Sat & Sun), all dates of three days should
be added to the list of days to use the schedule.
When Special Day Schedules are running, Normal Schedules
are disabled. If an invalid schedule exists, the following
warning message will be displayed. “There is a camera with
no recording schedule. Are you sure to save the settings?”
143
Set a Special Day Schedule
●
Edit a Schedule Type
1
2
In the Special Day Schedule window, click a
schedule type in the Schedule Type list to
select it.
Click Edit.
This will bring up the Edit Schedule Type
dialog.
Y
P
O
C
Enter a new name. For example, you may
wish to change the name “Company Holidays”
to “Company Special Days”.
3
Click OK.
The new settings are saved and the dialog
closes.
●
Delete a Schedule Type
1
2
In the Special Day Schedule window, click a
schedule type in the Schedule Type list to
select it.
Click Delete.
The schedule type is deleted.
Note
144
If you delete a schedule type where there are dates associated
with that schedule, a warning will appear. Delete the associated
dates before deleting the schedule type.
Set a Special Day Schedule
Add and Delete a Day
Select Date calendar allows you to select a day that can be used for the schedule type.
To add a day, operate as follows:
●
Add a Day
1
In the Special Day Schedule window, click a
schedule type in the Schedule Type list, for
example, “Company Holidays” (created on P.
142) and then in the Days list click Add.
Y
P
O
C
This will bring up the Select Date calendar
(see below).
2
4
Click to select a day in the calendar, then click
OK.
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Click Add again to add another day to the
same schedule type if you wish.
Added days are shown in the Days list (see
example on next page).
Other calendar selection methods are shown
on the next page.
Click to scroll back
through the months.
Click to scroll forward
through the months.
Click a day to
highlight it, then
click OK to
bring up that
day in the Days
list.
145
Set a Special Day Schedule
Alternatively, click the current month
and a month list will appear.
To select another year, click
the current year and scroll
down or back up, using the
up/down arrows.
●
Y
P
O
C
Delete a Day
1
2
Note
146
In the Special Day Schedule window, click a
schedule type in the Schedule Type list, for
example, “Company Holidays” and then in the
Days list click one of the days associated with
the schedule type.
Click Delete below the Days list. The day is
deleted from the schedule type.
If you attempt to associate the same day with different special
day schedules, a warning brings up and asked to delete the
other entry before creating a new one.
Expired days are listed in italics.
Set a Special Day Schedule
●
Save Changes
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
The bottom right-hand
corner of the
Recording Schedule
window consists of
two buttons, Save
Schedule and
Discard Changes.
1
Click Save Schedule to keep all your settings.
The settings are then saved to the Storage Server.
Click Discard Changes to cancel any changes you have made.
2
If you wish to return to the Viewer, select View > Viewing Screen from the menu
bar.
147
Display Recording Setting Summary
Check Summary Information of a Recording Schedule
Display the summary information of the set recording schedule.
Y
P
O
C
Display Record
Setup Summary is
located at the centerbottom of the Special
Day Schedule
window.
Click Display Record Setup Summary to
display the Record Setup Summary dialog.
The Record Setup Summary dialog shows the following information for the time period
where the highest load is expected when the schedule is performed.
Number of Camera Servers
Number of Camera Servers with Motion Detection
Total Recording Frame Rate
Total Recording Frame Rate (Continuous Recording)
Total Recording Frame Rate (Sensor/Motion Detection Recording)
Maximum Retained History
Maximum File Size/Duration
Disk Space Used
148
Display Recording Setting Summary
After confirming information, check the details and click OK to close the Record Setup
Summary dialog.
If the load is too high, adjust the recording schedule.
Note
Tip
Click Copy to copy the contents of the Recording Setting
Summary dialog to the Clipboard.
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
149
Display Recording Setting Summary
Check Summary Information of Storage Server
You can check summary information of a specified Storage Server.
Y
P
O
C
The Display Camera
List Summary button
is in the bottom center
of the Camera
Summary screen.
Tip
The Display Camera List Summary button is gray out in Storage Servers
in older version.
When the Locations/Zones tab is selected, the Display Camera
List Summary button is gray out.
Click the Display Camera List Summary
button to display the Camera List Summary
dialog box.
The following information is displayed in the Camera List Summary dialog box.
Total bandwidth usage (units of Mbps)
Number of frames queued for writing to each drive of the Storage Server
150
Display Recording Setting Summary
Check the details and click OK to close the Camera List Summary dialog box.
Note
Y
P
O
C
4
Register Camera Server and Set Recording Schedule
Tip
The Camera List Summary dialog box displays information
about the Storage Server selected in the Storage Server List. It
does not display the totals for all Storage Servers.
The number of frames queued for writing displayed here is the
number of frames queued for recording.
If the number of frames queued for writing always exceeds
5,000, reduce the video recording frame rate, or decrease the
image size or quality to reduce the number of frames queued
for writing.
If the number of frames queued for writing exceeds 10,000,
dropped frames occur.
Click the Copy button to copy the contents of the Camera List
Summary dialog box to the clipboard.
Click the Update button to update display the latest data and
update the camera list display.
You can check the number of frames queued for processing for the entire
frame queue of each camera on the Camera Summary screen (➝P.82).
151
Y
P
O
C
152
Chapter 5
Y
P
O
C
Viewer Reference
Chapter Overview
This chapter explaines how to use and configure the Viewer.
●
Set Viewer
●
Arrange and Save Layouts
●
Video Window Operation
●
Use Timeline and View Events
Explains how to configure settings that are specific to the Viewer.
Explains how to arrange layouts and set layout sequences.
Y
P
O
C
Explains how to create a video window and display it in the Viewing Area and control the
Camera Server.
Explains how to use the Timeline for live and recorded viewing as well as view and search
events.
154
5
Viewer Reference
Y
P
O
C
155
Viewer Operation Flow
Location list (➝ P. 187)
Drop-down menu indicating
locations available in the system.
Menu bar
Access common menus
from here.
Zone list (➝ P. 187)
Drop-down menu indicating
zones within a location.
Camera Control Panel
(➝ P. 195)
Camera Control Panel enables
you to control a camera and
quickly determine a camera
position.
Y
P
O
C
Event indicator (➝ P. 193)
Color bar is displayed at the
top of live Video Windows
when an event occurs (if
enabled).
Viewing Area for Video
Windows (➝ P. 162)
Video Windows can be
arranged here. Video Windows
can be re-sized as well.
They can also be arranged into
a uniform grid.
Video Window (➝ P. 188)
Recorded videos and live
videos are displayed in these
windows.
Camera Server (➝ P. 204)
Name of the Camera Server
currently selected.
Playback control (➝ P. 204)
Click the VCR-like controls to
play, rewind, fast forward or
jump to previous and next
events.
Timeline control (➝ P. 204)
Scroll forwards through the
current day or jump forward
incrementally by day or
week.
Timeline (➝ P. 204)
Past date and time as well as events which
occurred are displayed here. Events are displayed
as bars colored according to the priority. Click and
drag the Time bar to go back or forwards in time.
156
Record Now button
(➝ P. 208)
A instant manual
recording for one
minute.
Capture Still Frame
button (➝ P. 209)
Click to keep the
current image on a
Video Window.
Viewer Operation Flow
Camera Selection Area (➝ P. 186)
Thumbnails of Camera Servers added to each zone are displayed
here. Thumbnail can be dragged onto the Viewing Area for viewing.
Video window menu icon
(➝ P. 199)
Select preset camera angles,
custom pan, tilt and zoom, and
select a Video Window size.
Live Events Log list (➝ P. 212)
Indicates events that have been
recorded on Storage Servers
after the Viewer was launched.
Y
P
O
C
Zoom In/Zoom Out buttons
(➝ P. 209)
Click to zoom in or out the
Timeline.
Event Search button (➝ P. 214)
Click to bring up a dialog and
enter searching condition such
as time range, Location/Zone
and priority to find the event
which occured in the past.
5
Viewer Reference
Jump to Time button (➝ P. 207)
Click to enter a specific date and
time to jump to, to start playing
recorded video. The Timeline
moves to the specified time.
Extract Video button (➝ P. 210)
Click to extract a segment of
video to save as file.
Return to Live button (➝ P. 211)
Click to return the Timeline
Playhead to the current time. If
you click this button while playing
recorded video, the selected
Video Window will return to live
video.
Timeline Play Head (➝ P. 206)
Drag the play head to a position on the Timeline to
start playing back recorded video from that time.
Timeline control (➝ P.205)
Scroll forwards through the
current day or jump forward
incrementally by day or week.
157
Start the Viewer
Note
To start the Viewer, you need the user name and password set
for the VK-64/VK-16 Storage Server.
How toLaunch
Before launching the Viewer, make sure your monitor resolution is set to 1024 x 768 pixels
or more.
●
Start the Viewer
Y
P
O
C
To start the VK-Lite viewer, double-click VK-Lite Viewer v2.0 on the desktop.
Or, from the Windows Start menu, click Programs > WebView Livescope >
Network Video Recorder VK-Lite v2.0 > VK-Lite Viewer.
To start the VK-64/VK-16 viewer, double click VK Viewer v2.0 on the desktop.
Or, from the Windows Start menu, click Programs > WebView Livescope >
Network Video Recorder VK Series v2.0 > VK Viewer.
The connect option menu for Storage Server appears. Select the Master
Storage Server option and click Connect.
Start-up Screen
localhost
Connects to Storage Server
and launches Viewer.
Select this option to use the
local PC where Viewer is
installed as Master Storage
Server.
Use IP address
Connects to Storage Server
and launches the Viewer by
specifying its IP address.
Select this option when
Storage Server and the
Viewer are installed on
separate PCs.
Not use Storage Server
Select this option to use
Viewer only without
connecting to Storage
Server.
158
Start the Viewer
Tip
If a connection error occurs, Master Storage Server may not work
correctly.
Launch by Connecting to the localhost
If you want to use the local PC where Viewer is installed as Master Storage Server, select
localhost to start Viewer.
1
Y
P
O
C
2
3
Click Connect.
Enter your User Name and
Password, and click Login.
5
Viewer Reference
Note
Select localhost from the
drop-down menu.
The user name and password for VK-64/VK-16 entered in this
step are configured by Storage Server Configuration dialog. They
are different from the user name and password used to log
Windows.
159
Start the Viewer
Launch Storage Server by Specifying the IP address
If you installed Viewer and Storage Server on separate PCs, specify IP address of Storage
Server and connect Viewer to the Storage Server.
1
2
3
5
160
Click Connect.
Enter IP address or host
name of Master Storage
Server in Host Name or IP,
and the port number in Port.
Y
P
O
C
4
Note
Select Use IP address from
the drop-down menu.
Click Connect.
Enter your User Name and
Password, and click Login.
If you need to use proxy server, you need to change the
Internet option settings in the following procedure:
1. Select Start > Control Panel > Internet Option.
2. Select the Connections tab.
3. Click LAN settings.
Change the proxy server settings.
If using proxy server between Viewer and Storage Server, it
should not perform response buffering. Proxies which are
configured to perform response buffering may lead to delays
in sending small amounts of data (such as events) from the
Storage Server to the Viewer. Apache proxy server does
perform response buffering so is not recommended.
You cannot transmit or receive audio when using proxy
server.
Start the Viewer
Launch without Storage Server (Viewer Only Mode)
You can use the Viewer only without connecting to a Storage Server. When Storage
Server is not used, some functions are not available.
●
Use Viewer only
1
2
Select Not use Storage
Server from the drop-down
menu.
Click Connect.
Y
P
O
C
Functions not Available in Viewer Only Mode
When you launch the Viewer with Viewer Only Mode, the following functions are not available.
●
Viewing Screen
●
Configuration and Preference Screen
5
Timeline is not displayed. Timeline under the View menu cannot be used.
Capture Still Frame feature cannot be used.
Search Events under the Edit menu cannot be used.
Live Events under the View menu cannot be used.
Shared Layouts are not displayed.
In the Add Layout Sequence dialog, a type of layout is fixed to Personal Layout Sequence.
Viewer Reference
●
●
●
●
●
●
● Recording Schedules tab is not displayed (→ P. 105). Some functions such as video
recording, sensor events, and motion detection are not available.
● In the Storage and Camera Server Summary, Storage Servers tab is not displayed (→ P. 82).
● In the Storage and Camera Server Summary, the Camera Server list shows only
Camera Server, Locations / Zones and Type (→ P. 82).
● In the Add Camera Server and Edit Camera Server dialog, the following items are
gray (disabled):
● Save Recorded Video on
● Camera Server Settings
● Camera Settings > Save video in
● In the Viewer Settings window (→ P. 166), items in the Event Notification Settings
area are gray (disabled).
161
Start the Viewer
Viewer Start-up Window
When you start VK-64/VK-16 for the first time when no Layouts have been configured, you
will notice that the Viewing Area is blank as shown below. Previously-configured cameras
on the network will appear as thumbnail images in the Camera Selection Area on the top
of the screen. These can be dragged onto the Viewing Area for monitoring. If your
Administrator has already created a Layout for you, then the Viewing Area will display
the first Personal Layout (or first Shared Layout if there are no Personal Layouts) as
shown in the example on the previous pages.
Y
P
O
C
Click
to maximize the
Viewing Screen.
You can
hide these
panels via
the View
menu.
Viewing Area
Refer to P. 172 for details on editing layouts.
Tip
162
While the Viewer Screen is active, your PC will not automatically
enter the Sleep or Standby mode.
Start the Viewer
Viewer Start-up Option
You can set the start-up option of the Viewer to omit the display of Start-up screen (➝P.
77) and login screen to enter a user name and password (➝P. 79, P. 160).
You can place a shortcut icon on the Desktop for your convenience by following the
method described below.
For this setting, you cannot use the shortcut icon that was automatically created on the
Desktop after installing this software, which is used for starting the Viewer.
Note
1
Password can be referred through the Properties of the shortcut
icon. You need to make sure that the Password is secure.
Y
P
O
C
Right-click on the icon for NVR_Viewer.exe located in the installation directory and
select Create Shortcut from the menu. The shortcut icon will be created. Move it to
the Desktop.
The default destination directory is shown below.
<System Drive>:\Program Files\Canon\WebView\NVR
2
System Drive is a drive that contains a directory (folder) in which
the Operating System files are stored. For example, if the
Operating System is installed on Drive C, your system drive is
Drive C.
Viewer Reference
Tip
5
Right-click on the shortcut icon that was moved onto the Desktop and select
Properties from the menu.
Specify Target as follows (using alphanumeric characters)
-h=<IP address of the Storage Server>
This specification is mandatory
(➝P. 79, P. 160).
-p=<port number> It can be omitted. When omitted, 80 is
specified (➝P. 79).
-u=<user name>
Specify the user name (➝P. 78).
-pw=<password> Specify the password (➝P. 78).
-u and -pw can be omitted. When omitted, the start-up
screen will not be displayed (➝P. 77, P. 158). Instead, the
login screen for entering a username and password is
displayed. When you use the Viewer alone, you also need to
specify “nohost” for -h.
Example
“C:\Program Files\Canon\WebView\NVR\NVR_Viewer.exe” -h=192.168.100.1 -p=80 u=admin -pw=NVR
Make sure to enter a space after
“C:\Program Files\Canon\WebView\NVR\NVR_Viewer.exe”.
163
Menu Bar of Viewer Screen
Functions of Menu Bar
The following functions are available from the menu bar.
Menu
Submenu
Function
File
Change Master Storage Server
Switches master storage servers. The connection menu for
storage servers is displayed.
Exit
Closes the application.
Edit
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Y
P
O
C
A selected video window is deleted and transferred to the
clipboard, so that the window can be pasted into the same
layout or another layout.
A selected video window is coppied into the clipboard, so that
the window can be pasted into the same layout or another
layout.
A cut/copied video window is pasted into the current layout.
A selected video window is deleted from the current layout.
Select Delete in the Storage and Camera Server Summary
screen, so that a selected storage server/camera
server/location/zone is deleted.
Select Delete in the Recording Schedules screen, so that a
selected normal schedule/special day schedule is deleted.
Select All
View
164
Selects all of the video windows in the current layout.
Search Events
Displays the Event Search dialog.
Configuration
Select Configuration while the viewer window is open, so that
the window switches to the Configuration and Preferences
screen.
Viewing Screen
Select Configuration while the Configuration and
Preferences screen is open, so that the window switches to
the viewer screen.
Fullscreen
The menu bar and the title bar are hid and the area for
displaying video windows becomes larger. Press the [Esc] key
to return to the previous status (return to the mode before
selecting the Fullscreen mode).
Captions
Switches display and hide video window's title bar.
Camera Selector
Switches display and hide the Camera Selection Area.
Timeline
Switches display and hide Timeline.
Live Events
The Live Events Log window is displayed at the same position
and in the same size as prevously displayed. The checkmark
in the menu means that the window is open. Select the menu
item again to close the window and the menu item is
unchecked.
Camera Control
Displays the Camera Control panel, allowing the display
positon settings or zoom.
Menu Bar of Viewer Screen
View
Help
Audio Panel
Displays the Camera Control panel, allowing the display
positon settings or zoom.
Status Bar
Switches display and hide the status bar. Several information
is displayed in the status bar, such as the total frame rate,
CPU %, the number of displayed events, and the number of
video windows.
About
The version information dialog appears, showing the version
information.
Y
P
O
C
5
Viewer Reference
165
Viewer Setting
■ Viewer Settings window
The Viewer Settings window is used for settings such as notification priorities and the live
viewing frame rate. Settings are stored on the Viewer PC, not on the Master Storage
Server.
Click Viewer Settings (Admin) or
Viewer Settings (Operators).
The Viewer Settings screen is divided into tabs for administrators and guestl users
depending on the settings. The Viewer Settings (Admin) tab is displayed only when the
user logs in as an Administrator. Each of these tabs consists of the following settings.
Y
P
O
C
Viewer Settings (Admin) tab
Master Storage Server - You can switch to display or not to display the Master Storage
Server option window (connection menu) on start-up, and also add/delete Master
Storage Server into/from the connect menu.
Layout setting - Confirm if the layout was preserved when quitting or when the screen
changes.
Event popup setting - Enables you to set whether video is displayed at the same time
as events occur.
Event Notification Settings - Set operator notification and adjust duration in seconds,
set operator acknowledgement (recognition) of an event, set an audio alert, and
suppress event display.
Viewer Settings tab
Video Viewing Settings - Select the maximum viewing frame rate for live videos.
Proxy Setting - Use this option to make an access to Storage Server via proxy server.
Audio Setting - Set automatic termination of audio transmission after a specified period
of time.
Focus Operation Setting - Set the focus position to return to the default setting of the
camera when operating the camera.
Still frame setting - Enables you to configure the date and time to be additionally
displayed on still frames.
Be sure to perform the operational tests after setting the viewer.
Note
166
Viewer Setting
■ Set the Tab for Administrator
Set whether to select the Master Storage Server when the
Viewer starts up
A Master Storage Server maintains settings for Camera Servers and Layouts.
The current Master Storage Server is indicated.
Y
P
O
C
The following settings are available.
Select the When starting, Master Storage Server is selected checkbox to enable
you to select the Master Storage Server when the Viewer starts.
2
Click Add Storage Server to add the current Storage Server to the connection
menu.
3
Click Delete Storage Server to delete the current Storage Server from the
connection menu.
5
Viewer Reference
1
Set layout of the Viewing Screen
If you wish to confirm whether the layout
information has already been saved when
finishing the Viewer or when switching to the
Viewing Screen, tick the Confirm if the layout
was preserved when quitting or when the
screen changes check box and restart the
Viewer. If not ticked, the layout information will
not be saved.
Set Event Popups
Select the Pop up the video window automatically
when event occur checkbox to display the live
video in the foreground and begin live viewing
when an event such as a sensor on occurs.
167
Viewer Setting
Set Event Notifications
When an event occurs, it is indicated in the Live Events Log in the Viewer. In Event
Notification Settings in the Viewer Settings window, Event Notification Settings area,
you can set up actions based on events according to the priority of the event.
●
Set alert of event in each priority level
Y
P
O
C
In the Priority area, you configure the following settings:
1
Tick the Operator Notification for box to enable a notification period when an
event occurs. Select a notification period in seconds from the Seconds drop-down
menu or enter it from the keyboard (0 - 99). When a event occurs, the event flashes
in the Live Event Log window for the period of time specified using this option, and
a color bar indicating the event’s priority light on the top of a live Video Window for
one minute.
If you specify 0 second, an event which has occurred will not flash and a color bar
will light for one minute.
2
3
Tick the Requires operator acknowledgement box for the event. When an event
occurs it will flash in the Live Events Log and the audio alert will sound (if
specified) until the operator double-clicks on the event (that is, the notification time
will not apply to the event in the event log).
Tick the Audio Alert box to have an audio alert play during the event notification
period.
The Windows system sound “Exclamation” is used for audio alerts (For a PC with
no sound port installed, a beep sound is used). This sound repeats for the duration
of the Operator Notification. If Operator Notification is not set, the audio alert is
played once.
4
Tick the Don’t show events to have the event not displayed on the Timeline of the
Viewing screen or on the Live Events Log window even if the event occurs.
Tip
168
Even if Don’t show event is ticked, events are shown in the
Search Results in the Event Search dialog.
Viewer Setting
●
Set duration of alert.
About Priorities
Set up notifications by
priority from 1 (highest) to 5
(lowest). Priorities are colorcoded as follows.
Color
Priority
Red
Highest
Orange
High
Yellow
Medium
Light Green
Low
Dark Green
Lowest
Y
P
O
C
5
Lower priority items can
have less notification
settings associated with
them.
Viewer Reference
■ Set the Tab for Guest User
Setting the Frame Rate during live viewing
The maximum frame rate when displaying live
video can be configured. Select the value of
the frame rate from the drop-down menu.
Select the AutoAdjust Frame Rate checkbox
to have the frame rate adjusted automatically.
Note
If a high maximum frame rate is specified, the load on the
computer CPU will be high and Viewer operations may take
longer. When Auto Adjust Frame Rate is ticked, frame rate is
automatically reduced when CPU load becomes high.
If the resolution is set to MPEG-4, the Max. Live Frame Rate
and AutoAdjust Frame Rate settings are ignored. In this case,
the frame rate setting of the VB-C60 is active.
169
Viewer Setting
Audio Transmission Setting
The camera which is sending or receiving
audio to a Viewer cannot interact with
other Admin or NC Viewers. Audio
transmission and reception can be
terminated automatically even if you
forget to disconnect the audio connection.
When using this option, tick The voice transmission will be ended for fixed time
automatically check box, and specify the period within the range from 1 to 60 minutes
(default is 10 minutes). When the specified period of time passes during audio
transmission, it will be terminated automatically.
Tip
Y
P
O
C
Automatic termination works even while audio is
transmitting/receiving. If switching the video window to another,
the audio function will become available again.
Focus Operation Setting
You can set the camera to return its focus
mode to the default setting when the
camera orientation is changed. The focus
mode returns to default if it has been
changed to Manual after any focus
operation using a preset with focus setting
defined or via Camera Control Panel.
Use this option by ticking the It returns to the default setting on the camera side when
the camera is operated check box.
Proxy Server Setting
VK-64/16
When you wish to access the Storage
Server Using the proxy server set in the
Internet Option, tick Use internet proxy
settings and restart the Viewer.
Note
170
To use a proxy server, you need to set the Internet option
settings (➝P. 79).
Viewer Setting
Superimpose the Date and Time on Still Frames
Select the Superimpose the date and
time on the still frame captured
checkbox to additionally display the date
and time of capture on still frames.
Save Viewer Settings
Y
P
O
C
5
Viewer Reference
The bottom right-hand corner of
the Viewer Settings window
consists of two buttons, Save
Changes and Discard Changes.
Click Save Changes to keep all your settings. The Viewer settings are then saved to
the local disk.
Click Discard Changes to cancel any modifications you have made.
If you wish to return to the Viewer, select View > Viewing Screen from the menu bar.
171
Arrange and Save Layouts
This chapter details how to create and save Video Window Layouts and Layout
Sequences.
■ Manage Video Layouts
Layout menu
The Layout menu allows you to save particular Video Window layouts for easy monitoring.
The name of the currently-displayed layout can be found in
the top-left corner of the Viewing Area, next to the Layout
button. You can create a new layout, save a layout or
open and rename a previously-saved layout.
Y
P
O
C
Click the Layout button to open the Layout menu. You can also right-click anywhere in the
Viewing Area to display the Layout menu.
Below the Layout menu options, existing Layouts
are displayed and divided into two sections.
Optional
Layout
Menu
Shared Layouts:
All the users can available these layouts. You need
Administrator privilege to create a layout (➝ P. 72).
Guest users cannot modify these layouts.
Shared
Layout
List
Personal
Layout
List
Personal Layouts:
Lists layouts created by the current user. These are
shown under the Shared Layouts list to distinguish
the different types of layouts. Other users cannot
use them.
Tip
172
The layout displayed when launching the Viewer is the first
layout listed in the Personal Layouts (or in the Shared Layouts if
there is no Personal Layouts).
Arrange and Save Layouts
●
To create a new layout (a previously-saved layout is displayed):
Click the Layout button to open the menu, and then select New Layout.
The Viewing Area will become blank and the default layout name “Untitled” will be
displayed.
The process of creating folders and saving a layout could be done in the following order:
1
2
3
Organize and create
Layout folders
Arranging Video
Windows in Layout
Save Layout to a
folder
Y
P
O
C
Drag the Camera Server’s thumbnails onto the Viewing Area to create the layout.
5
Viewer Reference
173
Arrange and Save Layouts
Organize Layouts and Layout Sequences
The Organize Layouts & Layout Sequences dialog allows you to create folders and subfolders in which to save item (layouts and layout sequences). To display the dialog:
●
Open the Layout menu and select Organize
The Organize Layouts & Layout Sequences dialog opens (Administrator version
shown). The Shared Layouts folder will not display if you have logged in as an Operator.
Y
P
O
C
Create a new folder.
Move an item to
another folder.
Move an item up or
down within a folder.
Delete an item or folder
containing items.
Edit an item name or
folder name.
Copy an item to
another folder.
●
1
Create a new folder
In the Organize Layouts & Layout Sequences dialog, click on a shared or personal
folder and then click Create Folder. The Folder Name dialog appears.
2
Enter a name up to 50 characters
and click OK.
The new folder will appear in the
Organize Layouts & Layout
Sequences dialog.
174
Arrange and Save Layouts
●
1
Move or Copy a layout or layout Sequence to another folder
In the Organize Layouts & Layout Sequences dialog, click an item to highlight it,
then click Move to Folder.
The Select destination folder dialog opens showing a list of created folders.
2
Click to select the target folder in the list
and click OK.
The item will be moved into that folder.
If you selected Copy to Folder, you can
copy items in the same manner.
Y
P
O
C
Move an entry up or down
●
Edit or delete a layout or folder
Viewer Reference
●
5
Click an item or folder to highlight it, then click Move Up or Move Down. The item will
move up or down within a folder.
Click an item or folder to highlight it, then click Edit. The respective Layout Name or
Folder Name dialog will appear for you to overwrite a new name.
Click an item or folder to highlight it, then click Delete. If you have Operator status, you will
not be able to delete a shared layout or layout sequence.
Note
You cannot change the parent folder names, Shared Layouts
or Personal Layouts.
You need Administrator privilege to manage shared folders
(➝P. 72).
175
Arrange and Save Layouts
Save a Layout or Layout Sequence
Administrators and Operators can save layouts and layout sequences to an existing folder
or a new folder via the Save Layout dialog.
●
Step 1: Open the Layout menu and select Save or Save As
The Save Layout dialog opens. A New Folder button
and Name field is also available for you to create a
new name and location for the copied layout or layout
sequence.
Operator’s
Save Layout dialog
Y
P
O
C
Administrator’s
Save Layout dialog
●
1
2
Step 2: Create a name for the layout or layout sequence
Change “Untitled” or an existing layout name to save the item with a new name.
Click a location in the list. Click to select the folder to save the layout and click OK.
The item is saved to that folder.
Alternatively, click Create Folder to create a new folder (➝ P. 174) and save the
item in there. For example, if you wish to save an Administrator-shared layout to a
personal folder.
Once you have saved an item, the name will
appear next to the Layout button in the Viewing
Area.
176
Arrange and Save Layouts
●
Opening a previously-saved layout
Click the Layout button to open the menu and then click a layout or layout sequence in the
list. The item will be loaded onto the Viewing Area.
If you select another item without saving the
current item, a dialog will appear prompting
you to save the current layout or layout
sequence (if the Layout setting (➝ P. 167) in
the Viewer Settings window is ticked).
Y
P
O
C
Arrange Layout Sequences
VK-64/16
You can set up an automated sequence of shared and personal layouts to display in the
Viewing Area at set intervals.
1
2
From the Layout menu, select New Layout Sequence. The Add Layout Sequence
dialog displays.
5
3
Use the Add Layout > button to add layouts to the new sequence. Click Up and
Down to change the display sequence of layouts. Click Delete to delete the layout.
4
In the Duration menu, select a set duration of display time for each layout or enter a
custom time, overwriting the existing time.
Viewer Reference
Enter a sequence name for the new layout sequence and choose a Type of layout
sequence from the menu, Personal Layout Sequence or Shared Layout
Sequence (you can switch between the two as you add layouts).
177
Arrange and Save Layouts
Enter a new name.
Select a layout
sequence type.
Click Add Layout to
add a selected layout
from the left-hand
column.
Select or enter the
time.
You can set the time
within the range from
1 to 9999.
Click on a
layout to
select it.
Y
P
O
C
Click OK to bring up
the Select destination
folder dialog.
Layout Sequence:
All the users can share these layouts. You need Administrator privilege to create a layout
sequence. Normal users cannot modify these layouts.
User Layout Sequence:
Lists layouts created by the current user. Other users cannot use them.
You can only save layouts as a layout sequence.
Note
●
Opening and running a layout sequence
To start the layout sequence, select it from the Layout menu.
When a layout sequence is running, further options are
available in the Layout menu.
Click Edit Layout Sequence to change settings in the
currently-running layout sequence. The current
sequence will be indicated as Paused.
Click Resume Layout Sequence to play the current
layout sequence.
178
Arrange and Save Layouts
■ Layout Grids
You can customize your layouts by applying one of the following grids:
None - You can arrange Video Windows
freely.
Alignment Grid - diplay a grid of dots in
the Viewing Area. You can re-size Video
Windows using the grid.
Y
P
O
C
Small Grid, Medium Grid and Large Grid - diplay a small (160x120), medium
(320x240) or large (640x480) grid where you can place Video Windows using the grid.
Custom Grid - You can set the grid size (➝ P. 184).
5
Viewer Reference
179
Arrange and Save Layouts
Alignment Grid
Select the Alignment Grid from the Layout Grids sub-menu. The Viewing Area displays a
grid of dots. When you place a Video Window, it “snaps” to the grid boundaries.
●
Drag, drop and re-size a Video Window
1
In the Camera Selection Area, click a
thumbnail image and drag its selection
boundary onto the Viewing Area grid.
Y
P
O
C
2
Move it to the position you want to
display. When you release the mouse,
the size and position are adjusted to
match the layout frame.
To re-size the Video Window, click any
corner and drag the image outwards to
snap to a larger grid area. Release the
mouse button. When you release the
mouse, the size and position are adjusted
to match the layout frame.
●
Create and align more Video Windows
Click and drag other
camera thumbnails onto
the Viewing Area to
create Video Windows
for monitoring, and resize
the window. A layout
example is shown to the
right.
180
Arrange and Save Layouts
●
Small, Medium and Large Grids
●
Drag a camera thumbnail image into a blank tile
When you select Small Grid, Medium Grid or Large Grid from the Layout Grids submenu, the Viewing Area displays “cells” for Video Windows. These are boundaries
indicating a uniform size which is used to display Video Windows in a tile-like manner.
1
Y
P
O
C
2
Move it to the position you want
to display. When you release the
mouse, the size and position are
adjusted to match the layout
frame.
5
Viewer Reference
Tip
In the Camera Selection Area,
click a thumbnail image and drag
its selection boundary onto the
Viewing Area grid.
The Layout menu is also available by right-clicking anywhere
in the Viewing Area.
A Video Window can be increased in size to take up a number
of tiles, (for example 4 tiles, 9 tiles etc) so that Video Windows
of different sizes/priorities can be viewed.
The size of the image immediately after dragging it over the
Viewing Area is fixed at 160x120.
181
Arrange and Save Layouts
The Viewing Area with a Small Grid
Y
P
O
C
The Viewing Area with a Medium Grid
Note
182
Although you can add more, the number of Video Windows you
can display simultaneously will depend on your video card, the
speed of your computer, the maximum frame rate (➝P. 169)
configured with Viewer setting, the video size and video quality
coming from the Camera Server and the size of each Video
Window displayed. A maximum of 16 cameras is recommended
in the Layout Area. If the number of video windows displaying
MPEG-4 live video exceeds 20, a warning message will appear.
Arrange and Save Layouts
The Viewing Area with a Large Grid
Y
P
O
C
5
Viewer Reference
In this example, the Camera Selection Area and Timeline are hidden (➝ P. 185).
183
Arrange and Save Layouts
Custom Grid
The Custom Grid fallows you to set customize a grid for displaying Video Windows.
●
1
Set a custom grid
Select Custom Grid from the Layout Grids sub-menu. The Custom Grid dialog
appears. Values are given in pixels.
2
3
In the Horizontal or Vertical field, overwrite the
existing value with a custom value, or use the
up/down arrows to select a value. When you adjust
the value in one field, you’ll notice the value change
in the other field. This is because the proportions of
the re-sized Video Window are constrained and the
dimensions are scaled accordingly.
Y
P
O
C
Click OK to close the dialog. The grid will re-size to your new settings.
Using Custom Grid may cause high CPU load.
Note
184
Arrange and Save Layouts
■ Hide and Show Task Areas
The View menu allows you to show/hide task areas and other display elements in the
Viewer. When you unselect Camera Selector and Timeline and then select Fullscreen,
the result is a large area in the Viewer for displaying more Video Windows as shown
below in the Large Grid example. Pressing the Esc key returns the menu bar. You can
also select to hide Video Window Captions, the Camera Control and Live Events.
The number of Video Windows in the display achieved is dependent on the display
resolution. A higher resolution will result in more Video Windows displayed.
Y
P
O
C
View ➝ Camera Selector
5
View ➝ Timeline
Viewer Reference
View ➝ Full-Screen (Large grid, 1280x1024). Pressing the ESC key to display the task
bar.
185
Basic Video Window Functions
This section shows you how to create Video Windows for viewing in the Viewing Area and
how to adjust camera angles.
■ Select Cameras for Viewing
Camera Selection Area
The Camera Selection Area is used to display thumbnails of all the cameras. You can
select another set of thumbnails of currently-available cameras via the Location and Zone
drop-down menus and then place them into the Viewing Area as Video Windows.
Y
P
O
C
The Location drop-down menu lists the physical locations of cameras on the system.
The Zone drop-down menu lists the groups of areas within each location.
When you select a location, its associated zones will be listed below.
Camera Thumbnails
When a Location is selected, the thumbnail images of the Camera Servers registered in
that Location will appear. Depending on the number of cameras in the selected Location, a
scrollbar at the base of the Camera Selection Area can be used to scroll the display of
thumbnails.
Each Zone is grouped into camera thumbnail images and these can be dragged onto the
Viewing Area to create Video Windows.
Tip
186
You can hide the Camera Selection Area to allow more display
space for Video Windows. From the View menu, select Camera
Selector to hide/show the Camera Selection Area.
Basic Video Window Functions
Locations and the Zones
Selection is performed in the following order:
●
1
2
3
Select a Location
Select a Zone
in that Location
Click and drag
thumbnails to
view live video
Step 1: Select a Location from the drop-down menu
Y
P
O
C
Click the Location drop-down menu or on the
down arrow.
A list of pre-configured locations appears.
Click a location in the list. Zones for that list will
appear in the thumbnail section to the right.
Viewer Reference
●
5
Step 2: Select a Zone from the menu or thumbnail folder region
Click the Zone drop-down menu or on the down
arrow.
A list of pre-configured zones appears.
Click a zone in the list.
Once a Zone is selected from the drop-down
menu, the Camera Selection Area for the selected
Zone moves to the left.
Alternatively, click the scrollbar
located under the Camera
Selection Area. Drag it to the
right until the desired Zone is
displayed.
187
Basic Video Window Functions
■ Basic Video Window Functions
Create, scale and move Video Windows
Once you have chosen a location and chosen a zone, you are ready to view one or more
cameras in that zone. Camera thumbnail images are used to create Video Windows in the
Viewing Area. The Viewing Area can support multiple Video Windows for live monitoring
and viewing recorded video simultaneously.
●
Click and drag a camera thumbnail onto the Viewing Area
Y
P
O
C
1
2
Click the thumbnail image and, while
holding down the mouse button, drag
its boundary anywhere onto the
Viewing Area.
Release the mouse button. The resized outline becomes a live Video
Window.
When placed, the Video Window
is re-sized according to the
Layout Grid.
A selected Video Window is
highlighted.
Note
188
An error message will appear if an error occurs in
video windows. Refer to P. 260 for details.
Basic Video Window Functions
●
Re-size a Video Window
1
Click a Video Window to highlight it. An
arrow icon will appear in the lower right
corner. Click the arrow icon and drag
outwards. You can also click on the other
corners and drag to re-size the window.
Release the mouse button when you
have reached the desired size.
Alternatively, click the Video
Window menu button and select
Video Display Size. Select Small,
Medium, Large, or Default from the submenu. The same menu is available by
right-clicking the view window.
Y
P
O
C
2
A right-click action on the Video Window
will also bring up the same menu.
Viewer Reference
●
5
Move a Video Window
Click anywhere on a Video
Window and drag it to any
position in the Viewing Area.
189
Basic Video Window Functions
Note
●
When Video Windows that are other than a standard resolution
(160x120, 320x240, 640x480) are displayed, the load on the
computer CPU will be high and Viewer operations may take
longer.
Add more Video Windows
Click and drag other camera thumbnails onto the Viewing Area to create Video Windows
for monitoring if necessary. Your Viewing Screen could look like this.
Y
P
O
C
190
Arrange Video Windows
There are various ways you can manage the layout of Video Windows in the Viewing Area
(➝ P. 180).
Note
In the Viewer, the number of Video Windows you can display
simultaneously will depend on your video card, the resolution
and quality settings of the camera and the Live Video Viewing
Settings (frame rate) set in the Viewer Settings window of the
Configuration and Preferences screen.
If the load on the computer CPU is high, Viewer operations
may take longer.
Select Multiple Video Windows
Y
P
O
C
You can select multiple video windows easily. You can also move, cut, or copy selected
multiple windows simultaneously.
●
Select Multiple Video Windows
There are three ways to select multiple windows:
5
Viewer Reference
On your keyboard, hold down the Ctrl key and click each
Video Window to select them, or.
Click outside the Video Windows
and drag a selection box around
the Video Windows you want
selected, as shown below. Only
windows contained within the
selection box are selected.
Dragging around part of an
image in the selection box will
not select it.
If you wish to select all Video
Windows, click Select All from
the Edit menu (or on your
keyboard press Ctrl + A).
Tip
Video Windows from different zones and locations can be
displayed in the same Layout.
You can copy and paste a multiple selection of Video
Windows at one time which can be pasted into and saved as a
new Layout.
191
Arrange Video Windows
■ Video Window Status
Video Window Properties:
Title bar - indicates name of camera, live or recorded video viewing.
Video display - displays live or recorded video.
Recorded video indicator - displays a time/date stamp in the title bar for recorded footage.
Event indicator - displays a colored bar across the top of the Video Window.
Pan, tilt and zoom controls - when the Video Window is double-clicked or the Video
Window menu item, Get Camera Control is selected, controls appear to enable pan, tilt
and zoom.
Y
P
O
C
Video Window states
Video Windows can be displayed in the Viewing
Area according to their conditions:
Live - Displays live video from a Camera
Server.
Recorded - Displays recorded video from a
Storage Server.
Live Events Log list
Double-click an event to view it in the
corresponding Video Window. The
Live Events Log opens automatically
when you launch the Viewer, if left
open in a previous session.
Recorded Events
Click to view recorded footage in the
corresponding Video Window.
192
Arrange Video Windows
Each Video Window displays video from an
individual camera. Video Windows can be
re-sized, repositioned or closed.
Title bar
The title bar consists of menu, camera name
and live or recorded status.
Y
P
O
C
Video display conditions
Live video
Recorded video,
Playback
5
Viewer Reference
The lightning symbol in the lower
right-hand corner indicates live video.
Recorded Video
Indicator
When recorded video
is shown, the title bar
on a Video Window will
change from black to
gray.
Event Indicator
If the option for Operator
Notification has been set, a
color bar will flash on top of a
live Video Window when an
event occurs. The color
indicates the event priority.
The bar will flash for a predefined time and then remain
steady for one minute until
disappearing. An audio alert
may also sound if pre-defined.
For recorded video, the
time/date indicator may
not fully display if the
Video Window size has
been reduced.
Color
Priority
Red
Highest
Orange
High
Yellow
Medium
Light Green
Low
Dark Green
Lowest
193
Arrange Video Windows
■ Pan, Tilt, Zoom Operation
This is done in one of three ways:
Directly from within the Video Window
Using the Camera Control Panel
Selecting a Preset
Note
●
For VB-C50FSi and VB-C50Fi, Pan and Tilt are not available.
If a fixed camera or an external camera such as VC-C50i is
connected to VB-C50i, you cannot use pan, tilt, and zoom
operations.
Y
P
O
C
Using the Camera Directly from within the Video Window
Enable the controls by double-clicking on a live Video Window.
Alternatively, click the down-arrow at the base of the Video
Window (or right-click on the window). A drop-down menu
will appear. Select Get Camera Control.
If the camera is being used by the Viewers or another VB
Administration Tools associated with the Camera Server, a
“Can’t get camera control” message will appear. You may
have to wait a few moments and attempt to get control later.
Arrows will appear in the cursor position when you
have gained control of the camera. When you move
the mouse cursor over a Video Window, the mouse
cursor changes its shape. Click and drag the cursor
in the direction of the arrow for pan and tilt. When
you move the mouse cursor to the center of the
image, a zoom in or zoom out control will appear.
Hold down the mouse on “+” to zoom in.
Hold down the mouse on “-” to zoom out.
When you have finished, select Release Camera Control from the Video Window menu.
194
Arrange Video Windows
Tip
●
If you have camera control, you can only drag the window by
clicking and holding the title bar.
If you did not make any control for 30 seconds, the message of
ÅgControl will be lost in 10 secondsÅh appears, and a 10second countdown will start.
You can still manipulate a camera that is currently recording.
If the recording position has been set, the Camera Server will
return to that position after the Viewer release camera control.
Using the Camera Control Panel
Y
P
O
C
Pan/Tilt controls. Click Clicking this button
Set Night to nudge or click and returns the camera
hold for continuous
to face the front.
Mode.
movement.
To display, select View > Camera Control
from the menu bar, or click the Video
window menu icon (or right-click in the
Video Window) to bring up a context menu
and select Camera Control.
If a Video Window is not selected, the
preview window will be blank. Click on a
Video Window to control the camera.
5
Viewer Reference
You can control the pan, tilt, and zoom
operation using a panorama image. Click
inside the Panorama window to adjust the pan
and tile angles so that the clicked position
becomes the center of the image.
Alternatively, you can move or zoom in/out the
yellow scope to perform the pan, tilt, and zoom
operation.
When the Video Window is selected, click Get
Control. Click Release Control when
finished.
Click this button to Click this button Click this button to
display exposure
to display white display the smart
control (➝ P. 196). balance control shade correction
controls at the
(➝ P. 197).
bottom of the panel.
If preset camera
angles have been
set up by your
Switch On and Off of
Administrator, they
external device
will be available from output of the camera.
a drop-down menu.
Note
If the digital zoom is enabled by the Camera
Server, a boundary between the optical and
digital zoom is displayed.
Click and drag the Zoom slider to perform the
zoom operation.
Click this button to display extended camera
control panel (➝ P. 198).
When using the VB-C60/VB-C300, you cannot use Night Mode in
the following cases:
When Day/Night is set to Auto on the Camera and Video Settings page
When the Night Mode is set to Auto with a recording schedule
Panorama picture needs to be set on the Camera Server in
advance. VB-C50FSi/VB-C50Fi cannot display panorama picture.
195
Arrange Video Windows
●
Exposure Control Items (when the Exposure Mode is Auto)
Selects the Metering Mode (VB-C60
only).
Refer to the Users Manual of the
camera for details.
Note
●
Set the Exposure Mode to Auto (VBC60, VB-C300).
Auto: Automatically adjusts the
exposure.
Auto (Flicker less):
This mode is only for the VB-C60.
Refer to the Users Manual of the
camera for details.
Auto (shutter priority):
Allows the value of the shutter
speed to be specified.
Y
P
O
C
Selects the Exposure Compensation
value. (VB-C300, VB-C50i series)
Off:
Exposure compensation is off.
Low:
Performs a low level of
exposure compensation.
Medium: Performs a medium level of
exposure compensation.
High:
Performs a high level of
exposure compensation.
Exposure can be adjusted for VB-C60 and VB-C300 only.
For the VB-C60, the values of exposure compensation are -3,
-2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3.
The Metering Mode is available for VB-C60 only. The mode is
deactivated when using other models.
Exposure Control Items (when the Exposure Mode is Manual)
Set the Exposure Mode to Manual (VBC300, VB-C60).
Manual: Dragging slide bars adjust the
aperture value, shutter speed,
and gain value.
Drag each slide bar to adjust the
aperture value, shutter speed, or gain
value.
196
Arrange Video Windows
●
White Balance Control Items
Drag each slide bar to adjust
each gain value.
Select the White Balance mode from the
drop-down menu. The following modes
are available (VB-C300, VB-C60).
Auto: Automatically adjusts the white
balance.
fluorescent H (VB-C300) or
fluorescent daylight (VB-C60):
Select this option when using
the camera under a day-light
fluorescent lamp.
fluorescent (VB-C300) or
fluorescent white (VB-C60):
Select this option when using
the camera under a day-light or
white fluorescent lamp.
fluorescent warm:
Select when shooting under warmcolor fluorescent lights.
Mercury lamp:
Select this option when using the
camera under a mercury lamp.
Sodium lamp:
Select this option when using
the camera under orangecolored sodium-vapor lamp.
Halogen lamp:
Select this option when using
the camera under a halogen or
incandescent lamp.
Manual:Drag each slide bar to adjust
the parameter (R or B gain).
Y
P
O
C
To forcibly adjust the white
balance, capture a white
object (e.g., a piece of white
paper) and click One-Shot
WB.
5
Viewer Reference
White balance can be adjusted for VB-C60 and VB-C300 only.
Note
●
Smart Shade Control
Select the Smart Shade Control
level between 1 (weakest) and 7
(strongest).
Tick to activate the Smart Shade
Control function (VB-C60 only).
The Smart Shade Control function is available for VB-C60 only.
Note
197
Arrange Video Windows
●
Other items
Select from Fast, Normal, and
Slow for Pan and Tilt.
Select from Fast and Slow for
Zoom.
Y
P
O
C
Switch between Auto Focus and Manual Focus.
Auto:
Adjust the focus automatically.
Auto (for dome housing):
When the optional dome housing is used, select this option to automatically adjust the
focus without focusing on the wall surface.
Infinity: Focus is fixed at a point of infinity.
Manual: Press and hold Far or Near button to adjust the focus. Clicking One Shot AF adjusts the
focus just once automatically (VB-C300, VB-C60).
Auto (for domes) is not available for VB-C60.
Note
●
Selecting a Preset Camera Angle
If preset camera angles have been set up and stored as
presets, they will be available from the Preset drop-down
menu of the Camera Control panel or a sub-menu. The
following explains how to select a preset from a sub-menu.
1
198
Double-click a Video Window
or select Get Camera Control
from the Video Window menu.
2
From the Video Window menu,
click Preset Camera Angles.
3
Select a preset position from
the sub-menu.
Arrange Video Windows
■ Other Video Window Functions
Change the Video Window size
Apart from manually clicking on the corner and dragging out the Video Window to a new
size, you can also select a set size from the Video Window menu.
To change the display size of a Video Window via the menu:
●
Open the Video Window menu and select Video Display Size.
Y
P
O
C
1
2
Click the Video window menu icon, or
right-click in the Video Window to bring
up a context menu.
Select Video Display Size from the
menu, and then select Small, Medium,
Large, or Raw from the sub-menu. A
Raw selection displays the Video
Window selected at the Video Receive
Size.
5
Viewer Reference
Change the Received Video size (VB-C60, VB-C50i/VBC50iR, VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi only)
You can select a video size received by the Viewer. To change the size of received video
via the menu.
●
Open the Video Window menu and select Video Receive Size.
1
2
Click the Video window menu icon, or
right-click in the Video Window to bring
up a context menu.
Select Video Receive Size from the
menu, and then select Small, Medium,
Large, or Default from the sub-menu.
Selecting Default displays the Video
Window in the size received from the
Camera Server.
199
Arrange Video Windows
If you are using the VB-C60, the menu items are as follows.
Note
Note
The MPEG-4 setting can only be made on the VB-C60.
If you specify MPEG-4 and perform live viewing on the VBC60, the video and audio are not synchronized.
When multiple Video Windows from a single Camera Server
are displayed and the Video Receive Size is changed from one
of them, the change will apply to all Video Windows.
Selected video receive sizes are saved when the layout is
saved.
The Video Receive Size used for Default is determined when
first displaying video from the Camera Server starts. Even if
you change the size from the Camera Server after the
connection is made, it will not apply.
Y
P
O
C
Enable Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is to compensate for camera views with strong backlighting. It can
be enabled from the Video Window menu.
●
While Camera Control is active, select Exposure Compensation.
1
2
200
Click menu bar of the Video window, or
right-click in the Video Window to bring
up a context menu.
Select Exposure Compensation from
the menu and select Off, or On from
the sub-menu.
Arrange Video Windows
You can set the exposure compensation to
Off, Low, Medium or High for VB-C300, VBC50i / VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi and VB-C50Fi.
If you are using a VB-C60, the options are -3,
-2, -1, 0, +1, +2, and +3.
Note
A checkmark (black circle) is attached to the selected item.
However, it is not displayed in front of the control.
Set this to “0” to set the exposure compensation to Off.
Y
P
O
C
Other Menu Options
Other functions available from the Video Window menu include:
Click Night mode and select Disabled, Enabled, IR
light off, or Enabled, IR light on from the sub-menu.
Selecting Enabled, IR light on will remove the IR cut
filter and turn the built-in IR light on. The IR light cannot
be used with the VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50FSi, or VBC50Fi.
5
Viewer Reference
Click Control External Devices to control any external
devices that may be connected to your Camera Server.
This is only enabled when you have camera control.
201
Arrange Video Windows
Click Viewer Shade Control to correct shaded
areas in the video window. It is available to one
specified vide window only. Details are explained in
the next page.
Admin Viewer starts up by clicking Admin Viewer if the Admin Viewer or NC
Viewer is already installed. For VB-C300, the NC Viewer starts up. For VBC60, Internet Explorer starts up and the VB-C60 top page is diaplayed. Refer
to your camera server's user's manual for more information on the Admin
Viewer or NC Viewer.
Y
P
O
C
When using audio function of VB-C60, VB-C300, VB-C50i/iR, or VB-C50FSi
user's manuals for more information on audio settings.
Click Close Window to close the Video Window that is currently selected. You can also
close a selected Video Window by pressing the Delete key.
Note
It is recommended to install the Viewer and/or NC Viewer in
advance.
The camera server which is sending or receiving audio cannot
interact with other Viewer or Admin Viewers.
Viewer Shade Control cannot be applied to multiple Video
Windows.
Viewer Shade Control is performed by using image processing
within the Viewer and not on the Camera Server. It can be
used on live or recorded video (see below).
Viewer Shade Control
Viewer Shade Control compensates darker regions of images and makes them lighter.
Correction only applies to the
displayed Video Window in the
Viewer.
Viewer Shade Control Off
Viewer Shade Control High
Darker regions are most affected by Viewer Shade Control.
202
Arrange Video Windows
Audio Panel
Clicking this button after selecting a Video
Window, or selecting a Video Window after
clicking this button starts audio playback.
When ticked, audio is
played back even
when a microphone is
used.
Click this button to
display silent detection
control.
Clicking this button after selecting a Video
Window, or selecting a Video Window after
clicking this button starts audio
transmission.
Y
P
O
C
When ticked, silent interval is detected
while transmitting audio. For a silent
interval, network load can be mitigated by
reducing data to transmit.
Note
Viewer Reference
Tick this option to
detect silent intervals
with predefined
sensitivity.
5
Tick this option to manually
specify the detection sensitivity.
Drag the slide bar to adjust the
detection sensitivity.
You cannot transmit and receive audio when using a proxy
server.
Audio playback is only performed during regular playback.
Audio playback is not performed in the following cases.
If multiple image windows are selected
While paused, or during fast forward, nudge forward, nudge
back, or rewin
203
Use Timeline and View Events
This chapter shows you how to use the Timeline for live and recorded viewing as well as
view and search events.
Timeline Overview
On the Viewing Screen, a timeline of past events associated with displayed cameras is
shown in the Timeline Area at the bottom of the Viewer as colored bars. Selecting a
colored bar moves the playhead to the event and the associated Video Window is switched
to playback mode.
Playback controls.
Buttons for playback,
rewind, etc.
Camera Server name
The name of the
camera currently
selected.
A manual recording
with duration of one
minute is initiated.
Zoom in or out of
the Timeline to see
events in more or
less detail.
Y
P
O
C
Scroll forward by hours,
by days or by weeks.
Darker areas indicate
recorded video for this
period.
You can save the
current image on a
Video Window in a
file.
Events for non-selected cameras
(Video Windows) in the Viewing Area
are called “secondary event.” They
are displayed in weaker colors than
primary events.
Playback controls
Playhead region
Previous Event.
Rewind.
Nudge Back.
Play/Pause.
Nudge Forward.
Fast Forward.
Next Event.
204
Click in this area of
the Playhead shaft
and drag to positions
on the Timeline.
Use Timeline and View Events
Monitor Live Video in relation to the Timeline
When a Video Window is created from a camera thumbnail, video is seen live. The
Playhead (shown below) will be in a “live” position. The “live” position represents the
present time. The playhead remain fixed as time scrolls to the left underneath,
representing the passage of real time.
Search for past
events.
Click to jump to a
specified date/time.
Extract recorded video
to save as another file.
Return the Playhead
to the Live position.
Y
P
O
C
Events associated with
selected cameras (Video
Windows) in the Viewing
Area are indicated in
stronger colors as primary
events.
Viewer Reference
Click the time bar and drag to
scroll through the Timeline.
5
Scroll forward by
hours, by days or
by weeks.
Day indicator.
Event display area.
Priorities are color-coded as follows.
Color
Note
Tip
If no cameras are selected, all events are
shown as primary events.
You can hide the timeline by de-selecting
Timeline from the View menu.
Priority
Red
Highest
Orange
High
Yellow
Medium
Light Green
Low
Dark Green
Lowest
205
Use Timeline and View Events
Use the Timeline to play and extract video
You can view recorded video by moving the playhead control in the Timeline or entering a
timecode and jumping to it. Methods include:
●
Use the Playback Controls
You can control to play, rewind, fast forward or jump
to previous and next events.
The fast forward and rewind speeds change by 1x,
2x, 5x and 10x each time you click the buttons.
Note
Tip
●
206
Y
P
O
C
Rewind and nudge back cannot be performed on video
recorded in MPEG-4 format.
The fast forward speed of video recorded in MPEG-4 format is
fixed at 2 times.
If a schedule that had previously been recording in MPEG-4
format is switched to recording in JPEG format, when rewind
playback from the JPEG format time range enters the MPEG-4
time range, although the rewind playback continues, the video
is not displayed and an error stating “No Recorded Video.” is
displayed.
You can simultaneously play videos from multiple camera
servers at the same time.
You can simultaneously play multiple videos from one camera
server, which were captured at different times.
Drag the Playhead to a new time
Click and drag the Playhead shaft to another location. When you
move the Playhead, you are effectively controlling all Video Windows
that have been selected.
Use Timeline and View Events
●
Click in the Event Display Area of the Timeline
Click in the Event Display Area of the Timeline. The
Playhead will move to that location and playback of
recorded video commences from that time.
Note
When you choose to play back video, the video is played. The
response and smoothness of the play back may depend on
network traffic and other properties of the network.
The time displayed on the Timeline is the time of PC where the
Viewer is running.
Y
P
O
C
●
Click and drag the time bar to move through the Timeline
●
Jump to time entered
5
1
Viewer Reference
Move your mouse pointer over the time bar and it
becomes a hand. Click and drag to the left or right to
move back or forward in time. You can only scroll
right to the current time, or “live” time.
Select a Video Window and click Jump to Time.
2
3
The Jump to Time dialog opens. Select a day
and/or time.
Click OK.
The Playhead and Timeline will move to the
time selected. If no Video Windows are
selected, only the timeline is moved.
Using the calendar is shown below.
207
Use Timeline and View Events
Click to scroll back to
the previous month.
Click to scroll forward to
the next month.
Click a day to highlight it,
then click OK to bring up
that day in the Timeline.
Click up/down arrows to
select a time or click
each time segment and
overwrite existing value.
Y
P
O
C
Alternatively, click the
current month and a
month selector will
appear.
To select another year, click
the current year and scroll
down or back up, using the
up/down arrows.
One-minute manual recording (Record Now)
A manual recording with duration of one minute can be initiated at the maximum frame
rate. The manual recording is displayed on the Timeline and Live Events Log as Manual
Rec. username). This is handy for capturing random events not associated with sensor
recording or outside preset recording times.
To initiate manual recording:
1
2
Note
208
Select a Video Window for
manual recording.
Click Record Now.
The Record Now function records at the maximum frame rate.
Extended recording time will use additional disk space on the
Storage Server. It is limited to 5 fps for VK-Lite.
The Record Now function is only enabled if a Storage Server is
configured for the camera.
Use Timeline and View Events
Note
Recording will be for approximately one minute. The actual
duration of recorded video may vary depending on settings
and network delays.
The priority of an event created by a manual recording using
Record Now will always be Priority 1.
The Record Now function allows recording video in JPEG
format. MPEG-4 recording is not available (VB-C60). If audio
transmission is enabled on the camera, audio recording is
also performed..
Shoot a Snapshot
Y
P
O
C
Click Capture Still Frame to keep
the current image on a Video
Window.
1
2
Click Capture Still Frame.
5
On Windows Vista, don’t specify the “Windows” folder or the
“Program Files” folder on the system drive to store snapshots
and video files, as image and video files can’t be saved in
those folders.
If Superimpose the date and time on the still frame captured is
selected in the Viewer settings, the date and time are
displayed in the lower right corner of the still frames (the
position, font, size, and color are fixed).
Viewer Reference
Note
Select a Video Window to
capture a still image.
Still frame images are saved in bitmap format.
●
Zoom In and Out of the Timeline
Click Zoom In to zoom into a time period in the Event
Display Area.
Click Zoom Out to zoom out a time period in the Event
Display Area.
209
Use Timeline and View Events
●
Click event to select it
A time segment with darker color
indicates that recorded video
exists for that period.
Click
event to
select it.
Move mouse over event to get details.
Camera Name
Type of event
User Name
When you click an
event to select it, the
associated Video
Window will display
the event(s).
Time of event
Y
P
O
C
Daylight Savings Indicator
The Storage Server will adjust for Daylight Savings if configured in Date and Time
property of the control panel as follows:
When normal time has changed to Daylight Savings time, time that is skipped is
displayed in the Timeline as missing.
When gaining time (rewinding the clock back from 02:00 to 01:00), the extra time is
duplicated.
Skipped Time
Duplicated Time
Note
Where Daylight Saving changes have occurred, the Timeline
display is still continuous. Only the labels are affected.
Extract video to save to a file
A portion of video can be saved to another location. Files are automatically saved as
QuickTime .mov format and can be viewed in a QuickTime player or any other player that
supports .mov files. A maximum of one hour of video can be extracted at a time. If you do
not have a QuickTime player installed, visit http://www.quicktime.com for a free download.
210
Use Timeline and View Events
●
Select a Video Window and time period then click Extract Video.
1
2
Click a Video Window to highlight it, then click and drag
a time period for it in the Timeline.
Click Extract Video. The Extract Video dialog opens.
3
Y
P
O
C
4
5
●
Click up/down arrows to
select a time or click each
time segment and overwrite
existing value.
Click OK to display the Save As
dialog. The Save As dialog
opens. Browse to a suitable
folder in which to save the
extracted video, and click Save.
5
Viewer Reference
Note
Date: Click the down arrow
to select the date, or click on
the date to directly input the
date.
You must select only one Video Window to extract video.
QuickTime player version 6.5.1 or later is recommended.
On Windows Vista, don’t specify the “Windows” folder or the
“Program Files” folder on the system drive to store snapshots
and video files, as image and video files can’t be saved in
those folders.
When recording video and audio together, you cannot save
only the video data or only the audio data. The video + audio
are saved in a single MOV file.
If you specify two or more MPEG-4 recorded footages for
writing, only the older/oldest footage will be saved.
If you specify JPEG and MPEG-4 recorded footages together
for writing, only the older footage will be saved.
Returning to Live Video
To return to the live video, click Return to Live ➞. The Playhead
returns to the live position in the Timeline.
211
Use Timeline and View Events
■ View and Search Events
Live Events Log list
The Live Events Log displays events that have occurred with one or more cameras after
the Viewer has been launched. Events are color coded according to priority.
Y
P
O
C
Click and drag scroll bar to view events.
The bell icon is displayed when the event is acknowledged by double-clicking. Double-clicking
the event to acknowledge it changes the icon to a dot.
Note
Tip
212
Only the most recent 200 events are shown in the Live Events
Log.
The Live Events Log window automatically opens when you
launch the Viewer, if you left it open after closing VK-64/VK-16.
Use Timeline and View Events
Display the Live Event Log List
To display the Live Events Log List:
●
Select Live Events from View Menu
From the VK-64/VK-16 menu bar, select View and Live Events.
Live Events Log list opens.
Overview of Alert Parameters
Y
P
O
C
Acknowledgement status
Priority of the event (1:Highest, 2:High, 3:Medium, 4:Low, 5:Lowest)
Event type that has occurred
Camera name where event occurred
Date and time of event
Location and Zone
Viewer Reference
●
Acknowledge and Viewing Events
A new event entry will appear at the top of the Live Events Log list and will flash for a
defined period if configured. If Operator Acknowledgement is required, the event will flash
indefinitely if not acknowledged.
1
In the Live Events Log, double-click on the event to acknowledge. Double-click
again if you need to check the video.
2
In the bottom right corner of the Viewer, click Return to Live ➝ when you have
finished viewing the event. The Video Window will return to live viewing.
5
213
Use Timeline and View Events
Search Events
If you have multiple events, you can initiate a search for a particular event via the Event
Search dialog.
To launch the Event Search Dialog:
●
Click Event Search
On the Timeline, click Event Search.
The Event Search dialog opens.
Enter a search start
date and time.
Y
P
O
C
Enter a keyword for
particular events.
Enter a search end
date and time.
Select
a camera.
Select a
Location and
Zone.
Select a
Priority.
Select a
state of
event.
Select a
type of
event.
Search
Result
Display Area
Double-click an event to view it in the Video Window, or click an event to
highlight it and then click View Event in Camera to view it.
214
Use Timeline and View Events
Select Criteria for Searching
When you initiate a search, certain criteria can be specified such as Priority, Location and
Zone on the network, a date range when the event may have occurred and a time period.
To initiate a search:
●
Step 1: Select a date and time range to search
Click in the From and To date panels and overwrite the existing entries for
month/day/year and time.
Y
P
O
C
Alternatively, click the down arrow next to each date panel
to bring up the calendar. Click off the calendar to close it
again.
In the Event Search dialog, you can also scroll through
time using the up/down arrows. Click an hours, minutes or
seconds segment to highlight it and then click the up or
down arrow.
Step 2: Select a camera
●
Step3: Select a Location and Zone to search
●
Step 4: Select a type of Event
Viewer Reference
●
5
Select the camera you want to search by
from the drop-down menu. Once you have
selected a specific camera, the Location and
Zone specified in Where are ignored.
From the Where fields, select a
Location and Zone from the dropdown lists.
Select a type of Event from the drop-down list.
215
Use Timeline and View Events
●
Step 5: Select a State
●
Step 6: Select a Priority
●
Step 7: Click Search
Select a State for the event, whether it was On or Off during
the period. Alternatively, select All States.
Select a Priority from the drop-down list.
Y
P
O
C
When you have entered the day and time range, click Search to initiate the event search.
Events that are found will be listed in the window below. If necessary, stop a search at any
time by clicking Stop Search.
Tip
You can search events by keywords, such as “deleting”,
“recording” or “frames” etc, when using customer trigger. Found
events will be event tips based on entered events.
View retrieved recorded video
To view video of when an event
occurs, click the event to highlight it
and click View Event in Camera to
view it in a Video Window.
You can also view recorded video by
double-clicking the event.
Clicking Cancel stops any searching
and closes the dialog.
Note
216
When you have finished viewing an event in a Video Window,
click Return to Live ➝ in the Timeline to return the Video Window
to live viewing.
Use Timeline and View Events
■ Popup Video upon Event Occuring
Select the Pop up the video window automatically when event occur checkbox under
the Event popup setting administrator tab in the Viewer Settings screen to display the
corresponding video window in the foreground and begin live viewing when a sensor input
or motion detection occurs.
Y
P
O
C
When motion detection is
on, the corresponding
video is displayed
automatically.
Viewer Reference
Note
5
If the video window that pops up is in the Viewer Area, that
window is automatically displayed in the foreground
The size of video windows that are displayed automatically is
Medium (320x240).
217
Y
P
O
C
218
Chapter 6
Y
P
O
C
Operation and Management
Chapter Overview
This chapter explains points to notice concerning the Storage Server when you operating
and maintaining the network camera system, as well as guidelines for operating the
system.
●
Health Check for Storage Server
●
Operation Guideline for Recording and Viewing
●
Operation Guideline for Sensor Event Recording
●
Optimization of Motion Detection Recording (Index)
Explains the messages displayed for VK events and gives example resolutions, and also
explains the number of frames queued for processing for each camera.
Y
P
O
C
Explains frame rates for recording and live viewing via the Viewer.
Explains operation tips concerning the sensor event recording, including points to notice
and counteractions against troubles.
Explains operation tips concerning the Motion Detection recording, including points to
notice and counteractions against troubles.
220
Health Check for Storage Server
VK Events (Timeline for VK Viewer)
If any of the events listed in the table below occurs, you may have to take the specified
counteraction.
The text within { } in each message depends on the situation.
Event type
Indicates the free
space on the disk
Starts and stops
deletion due to space
shortage. (*)
Pauses and resumes
recording due to
space shortage. (*)
Recording frame rate
change
Indication (on) / recovery (off)
{Drive Name} is running out of
space: {Situation}
Description
Counteraction example
This event occurs when the disk
free space has run under the
specified value or the used disk
space has exceeded the
specified valued.
In this case, data may be
deleted before the designated
storage time elapses.
Disk capacity indication is only
effective when it is on.
Review the
recording and
Camera
Server settings
(➝P. 57, P. 100)
Y
P
O
C
Start (on)/Stop (off)
Deleting files on Drive {Drive
Name} due to disk free space
shortage: {Situation}
This event occurs when the disk
free space has run under the
threshold value or the used disk
space has exceeded the
threshold valued.
Start (on)/Stop (off)
Recording paused due to disk
free space shortage on Drive
{Drive Name}: {Situation}
This event occurs when the disk
free space has run under the
threshold value or the used disk
space has exceeded the
threshold valued.
Error occurrence (on) /
recovery (off)
Connection to host ({Camera
Server Address}: {Port}):
{Situation}
This event occurs when an error
has occurred while connecting
to the Camera Server. However,
it does not necessarily occur for
every connection failure. When
this event occurs, the recording
engine tries for reconnection
and a COMM error occurs if the
retry fails.
Review the
network
connection
(➝ P. 100).
Effective recording rate
({recording rate before
change} ➝{recording rate
after change} %)
Example:
Ex. “Recording rate (100.0 ›
90.0 %)”
* This is not an On/Off event.
This event indicates that the
recording frame rate has been
reduced due to increased server
load.
Review the
recording
settings or
consider
adding the
Storage Server
(➝ P. 88).
6
Operation and Management
Connection error to
the Camera Server
Message
For the items marked with (*), refer to “Disk Space Management <Important>” (➝ P. 64).
221
Health Check for Storage Server
Number of Frames Queued for Processing
The Camera Summary screen displays the number of frames queued for processing for
each camera, allowing you to check the load conditions of the PC.
This information is updated at every 5 seconds.
Note
222
Y
P
O
C
If the number of frames queued for processing exceeds 500,
either reduce the video recording frame rate, or reduce the image
size or quality, etc. in order to reduce the number of frames
queued for processing. If the number of frames queued for
processing exceeds 1,000, dropped frames may occur in the
recorded video.
Operation Guideline for Recording and Viewing
The following explains the automatic frame rate adjustment function for viewing and
recording.
This function checks the load of the PC on which the Storage Server and the Viewer are
running and adjusts the frame rate for video recording and live viewing.
Note
Using this function is recommended; however, make sure you
perform tests under actual conditions before starting operations.
Live-View Frame Rate Adjustment
●
Y
P
O
C
Auto Adjust Frame Rate in the Viewer Settings (➝ P. 169)
* This option is enabled by default (recommended).
When displaying live video, the Viewer requests the camera to send the video at the
specified frame rate (➝ Max. Live Frame Rate on P. 169).
If you use this function, you can maintain a stable display of live video with a temporarily
lowered frame rate even if your PC temporarily becomes highly loaded for some reasons.
6
If you do not use this function, menu operation or display response may be affected when
the load on your PC is high.
Operation and Management
For video in MPEG-4 format, the Max. Live Frame Rate and AutoAdjust Frame Rate
settings are ignored, and the frame rate that is sent from the camera is displayed.
223
Operation Guideline for Recording and Viewing
Recording Frame Rate Adjustment
●
Reduce recording frame rate when disk is under high load in the
Storage Server Configuration dialog (➝ P. 57)
* This option is enabled by default (recommended).
When the network recording software writes images received from cameras into the hard
disk, if the load (mainly the load of writing into the hard disk) of the PC on which the
Storage Server is running is too high, the software cannot write the images immediately.
Y
P
O
C
If the amount of the image that is waiting to be written increases for a certain period of
time, the Storage Server considers the PC to be highly loaded. When this happens, the
Storage Server stores images at intervals rather than storing all of the images the Storage
Server received, in order to reduce the PC load.
If you use this function, you can avoid recording failure as much as possible even if your
PC temporarily becomes highly loaded for some reasons. When using this setting, adjust
the video recording frame rate so that it does not drop below 0.5 fps.
Note that events are generated when the network recording software starts and ends the
operation of the function (➝ P. 288, “Changing the Recording Frame Rate”). You can
check the operating status of the function via the Event Search dialog (➝ P. 214).
If you do not use this function, recording may be interrupted when the load on your PC is
high. This software cannot detect the recording interruption.
This function is disabled when the Resolution is set to MPEG-4.
224
Operational Guideline for Sensor Event Recording
Proper Operation of Sensor Event Recording (Optimization
of Sensor Arrangement and Sensitivity)
Frequent sensor events result in high CPU load on your PC, and the recording frame rate
may be reduced or recording may be interrupted. If you have 10 or more sensor events per
minute continuously, we recommend continuous recording.
For each Storage Server, it is recommended to lower the sensor sensitivity or use
continuous recording.
20,000 or more sensor events occur a day.
10 or more sensor events occur every minute.
Y
P
O
C
Check the number of sensor events with the status bar.
Tip
6
Operation and Management
225
Optimization of Motion Detection Recording (Index)
The Motion Detection recording is not suited to applications where high levels of reliability
are required. Therefore, it is recommended to use continuous recording for monitoring or
other purposes if consistently high levels of reliability are required. Canon accepts no
liability whatsoever for faults, etc. resulting from the use of the Motion Detection recording.
Frequent motion detection events result in high CPU load on your PC, and the recording
frame rate may be reduced or recording may be interrupted. If you have 10 or more motion
detection events per minute continuously, we recommend continuous recording.
Frame Rate indicates the number of frames for Motion Detection recording. Lowering this
value mitigates load on the Storage Sever.
Tip
●
Y
P
O
C
Longer before event recording with insufficient memory may
lead to the use of disk-based virtual memory which will greatly
reduce performance. Shorter before event recording will
reduce memory usage.
The full requested duration of post event recording may not be
available due to data size and network delays.
Motion Detection Setting for Each Camera Model
VB-C60, VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi, VB-C50Fi, VB150
Configure the Motion Detection settings on the Camera Server.
Please refer to the Camera Server User’s Manual for details.
For the VB150, Video Input must be set to Single.
VB-C300
Configure the Motion Detection settings on the Storage Server.
Refer to “Setting Motion Detection Recording” (➝ P. 124) for details on how to set the
Motion Detection parameters.
Typically, set the total frame rate to 150 fps (e.g., 30 fps with five cameras) with the display
resolution of QVGA.
226
Chapter 7
Y
P
O
C
Backup Scheme
Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how to make backups for each purpose.
Since the volume of video data the largest among various data types requiring backup, you
must carefully choose backup equipment and learn the backup techniques.
Y
P
O
C
228
Purpose
Purposes of backup include.
Backup for Data Protection
Prevents data from system crush or hard disk failure. This type of back up targets video
data, event data, and configuration files.
Backup for Archive
Stores recorded video data and event data on other media for a long period of time.
Y
P
O
C
7
Backup Scheme
229
Preparation
Backup Device
Prepare necessary equipment for backup depending on the data quantity of the VK-64/VK16. Basically, you should use the DDS-4 type device if a single backup copies several
Gigabytes through 40 GB of data, and DAT72 or AIT if it copies around 70 GB of data.
Further, if backup data quantity reaches 100 through 400 GB, you should use the LTO
device. If you need more capacity or want to omit media replacement, you can consider
auto loaders for the LTO device.
Backup Example for VK-64/VK-16
If 10 Camera Servers record video for 30 days at 1 fps (10 KB)
Y
P
O
C
the required data capacity is 300 GB per month, 70 GB per week, and 10 GB per day.
In this case, it is recommended to use the LTO device (Ultrium tape device). This type
of device records 100 through several hundreds GB of data at the average transfer
speed of 25 through 30 MB/sec (or 40 through 60 MB/sec when data is compressed).
The time required for making backup of data for 30 days (300GB) is approximately
12,000 seconds (i.e., 3.5 hours). The time is shortened to approximately 2.5 hours
when data is compressed (Although the hardware specifications mention that the
transfer speed will be doubled by compressing data, the expected compression ratio
depends on data formats. Therefore, it is dangerous to think so).
The time required for making backup of data for a week (70GB) is approximately 2,800
seconds (i.e., a little longer than 46 minutes).
The time required for making backup of data for one day (10GB) is approximately 400
seconds (i.e., 6 minutes 40 seconds).
Notes: Recording does not stop while making a backup of data; however, the recording
frame rate may be reduced from the specified value due to disk I/O load and
CPU load.
Tip
Video data for VK-64/VK-16 is irreversible compressed data.
Compression process done by tape or other devices is not
necessary.
Backup Tool
It is recommended to use a third-party backup tool for Windows. Read the manual of the
tool for deployment.
Restore Server for Archiving
If the purpose of backup is archive, you should prepare a separate PC for the Storage
Server to which data will be restored. This PC must have the same drive configuration
(e.g., hard disk configuration). For example, if the source server’s system drive is C and
data storage drive is D, and video data drive is E, you must configure the PC with the
same drive configuration. However, the hard disk capacity must be determined according
to data to restore.
230
Files to Make a Backup
Storage Location of Video Data, Audio Data, and Event Data
Video data being recorded is saved in a temporary file (refer to “About Temporary File”
below), and the file is settled and saved as video data when its size reaches 1 GB (by
default) to the storage drive.
Audio data is recorded using the G71 µ Law format, and saved in the QuickTime file
format. The audio recording bitrate is 64 Kbps.
The recorded video data, audio data, and event data are saved in the following folders
according to your settings for Save video in and Drive when you register Camera Servers
(➝ P. 98).
●
Y
P
O
C
Recorded Video data
Save video in: \WebView-NVR\videofiles
The following two file types are backed up:
File name =
NVR_INDEX_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.mov
Recording start date_time Recording end date_time
Camera ID
(For JPEG Video)
File name =
NVR_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi
OR
(For MPEG-4 Video)
File name =
NVR_MPEG4_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.mov
7
Tip
Backup Scheme
These two files are used in pairs. Be sure to back up both files.
Note
The recorded video data file name contains the Greenwich Mean
Time as the time stamp.
About Temporary File
File name = NVR_STANDBY_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi
File name = NVR_STANDBY_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi.tmp
File name = NVR_STANDBY_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.mov
File name = NVR_STANDBY_MPEG4_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.mov
These four files are not yet settled by the system.
231
Files to Make a Backup
Recorded Data Concept
Video data being recorded is saved in a temporary file, and the file is settled and saved as
video data when its size reaches 1 GB (by default) to the storage drive. This recording unit
can be changed in the Maximum file size/duration field, in the Storage Server
Configuration window’s Settings tab (➝ P. 57).
Temporary files cannot be backed up in the normal procedure.
●
Audio data
Save video in: \WebView-NVR\videofiles
Y
P
O
C
The following file types are backed up.
File name =
NVR_AUDIO_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.mov
Recording start date_time Recording end date_time
Camera ID
Tip
Temporary files
The recorded audio data file name contains the Greenwich Mean
Time as the time stamp.
The following files are the files before being settled by the system.
File name =NVR_STANDBY_AUDIO_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi
●
Event data
Save video in: \WebView-NVR\eventfiles
The following file types are backed up:
File name = NVR_EVENT_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.evt
Camera ID
Recording start date_time
Tip
232
The recorded event data file name contains the Greenwich Mean
Time as the time stamp.
Files to Make a Backup
●
Configuration files
The configuration files for the Storage Server and Viewer are saved in the following folders
of the PC where each program is installed.
Configuration file path for OS other than Windows Vista
<System Drive>:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Canon
\WebView\NVR\
Configuration file path for Windows Vista
Y
P
O
C
<System Drive>:\ProgramData\Canon\WebView\NVR\
Back up the entire contents of this folder.
Tip
The configuration file names do not appear if the “Show hidden
files” is not checked under the Windows Folder Option.
Recording (For JPEG Videos)
NVR_STANDBY_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi
NVR_STANDBY_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi.tmp
NVR_STANDBY_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.mov
NVR_STANDBY_AUDIO_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi
NVR_EVENT_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.evt
7
Backup Scheme
Recorded video data (after settled)
NVR_INDEX_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.mov
NVR_MEDIA_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.avi
NVR_EVENT_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.evt
You cannot use the shadow backup function of Windows Vista.
Tip
233
Backup for Data Protection
About Backup
When making a backup of data for protection, you must back up the following data:
Recorded video data ---- It is recommended to make an incremental backup of this data.
Refer to P. 231 for the file names and storage location.
Event data ----------------- It is recommended to make an incremental backup of this data.
Refer to P. 232 for the file names and storage location.
Configuration file --------- Usually, make a backup of the configuration file when the
system is installed, and do it again each time you change the
settings of the VK-64/VK-16. However, if the management is
complicated, you can perform a full backup every day. Refer to
P. 233 for the storage location.
●
Y
P
O
C
Notes on Backing Up Recorded Video Data
Video data being recorded is saved in a temporary file on a hard disk drive. The temporary
file cannot be backed up in the normal procedure. Refer to “Recorded Video Data” (➝ P.
231) for details.
The temporary file cannot be backed up until it is converted into video data.
You should choose the backup hardware best suited for the backup data quantity.
Basically, you should use the DDS type device if a single backup copies 1 through 10 GB
of data, and AIT device if it copies 10 GB through 100 GB of data, and LTO device if it
copies 100 through 400 GB of data. If you need more capacity, you need to consider
multiple backup devices. Also, it is recommended to use a backup device with a high data
transfer rate.
If the total capacity of the hard disk reaches several terabytes, you should rather consider,
than making backups, using hot-spare hard disks or highly reliable storage system, or
further reliable and available RAID system.
234
Backup for Archiving (Long-Term Storage of Data)
When making a backup of data for long-term archive, you must back up the following data:
Recorded video data ---- It is recommended to make an incremental backup of this data.
Refer to P. 231 for the file names and storage location.
Event data ----------------- It is recommended to make an incremental backup of this data.
Refer to P. 232 for the file names and storage location.
Configuration file --------- Usually, make a backup of the configuration file when the
system is installed, and do it again each time you change the
settings of the VK-64/VK-16. However, if the management is
complicated, you can perform a full backup every day. Refer to
P. 233 for the storage location.
●
Y
P
O
C
Notes on Backing Up Recorded Video Data
Video data being recorded is saved in a temporary file, and the file is settled and saved as
video data when its size reaches 1 GB (by default) to the storage drive. The temporary file
cannot be backed up in the normal procedure. Therefore, backup only the settled files.
Refer to “Backup for Data Protection” (➝ P. 234) for details.
When choosing the backup device, consider the backup unit. For example, if the backup
unit is 100 through 400 GB, use a high-density tape device called “LTO device”. If it is
around 2TB (far beyond 400 GB), consider LTO auto loader device.
7
Backup Scheme
235
Backup Procedure for Video Data and Event Data
Back Up Recorded Video Data and Event Data.
1
Estimate the total quantity of recorded video data for backup.
The video data quantity per day can be calculated as: Image file size per frame x
Frame rate x Number of Camera Servers x Recording time (seconds) per day.
Refer to “Server Sizing Concept” (➝ P. 31) for details.
2
3
Prepare the backup device and backup tool for Windows according to the estimated
quantity.
Set up the backup tool as directed on P. 230.
Be sure to exclude the temporary files from the backup target.
Note
236
Y
P
O
C
If the VK-64/VK-16 continues recording video while making a
backup, you must take into account the increased I/O load on the
hard disk due to data transfer to the backup device. If the
recording frame rate of the Storage Server is reduced by
performing the backup, consider the following:
Lower the recording frame rate during backup in the
Recording Schedule Setting window.
Establish multiple I/O channels (e.g., RAID cards) on the
Storage Servers to deploy multi-storage configuration and
distribute the recorded video data among servers. Choose a
backup device according to the storage configuration.
Use multiple Storage Servers and use a dedicated backup
device for each server. Refer to P. 30 for how to use multiple
Storage Servers.
Restoration Procedure
Restore Data from Backup for Data Protection
The following explains how to reconstruct the Storage Server for the VK-64/VK-16 for
maintenance or recovery from a failure.
1
2
Check that the PC hardware environment has been restored to the former state.
Be sure to use the same folder organization as before.
Install the VK-64/VK-16.
3
After installation completes, stop the Storage Server from the Storage Server
Configuration window.
4
Restore the VK-64/VK-16’s configuration file to the former location.
The default location is as follows:
Y
P
O
C
Configuration file path for OS other than Windows Vista
<System Drive>: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Canon\
WebView\NVR\
Configuration file path for Windows Vista
<System Drive>:\ProgramData\Canon\WebView\NVR\
5
Restore the recorded video data file to the former location.
The default location is as follows:
<Save video in>: \WebView-NVR\videofiles
6
Restore the event data file to the former location.
The default location is as follows:
7
<Save video in>: \WebView-NVR\eventfiles
8
Start the Storage Server from the Storage Server Configuration window.
Backup Scheme
7
Check that the recording operation is performed correctly. Also check that restored
video data is played back correctly.
Note
If the Maximum retained history setting is used in the Storage
Server Configuration window and the restored video data
contains data exceeding the retaining period, that data will be
deleted when the Storage Server starts.
237
Restoration Procedure
Restore Data from Backup for Data Archiving
The following explains how to restore only necessary files from the data backup for
archive.
1
Check that the drive configuration of the PC to which the files are restored is the
same as the PC from which the files were backed up.
Be sure that the hard disk has a capacity larger than the total size of the video data
files to restore.
2
3
Install the VK-64/VK-16.
Y
P
O
C
Restore the VK-64/VK-16’s configuration file to the former location. The default
location is as follows:
Configuration file path for OS other than Windows Vista
<System Drive>: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data \Canon\
WebView\NVR\
Configuration file path for Windows Vista
<System Drive>:\ProgramData\Canon\WebView\NVR\
4
Uncheck the Maximum retained history option in the Storage Server Configuration
window.
5
Launch the Viewer and delete all the schedules for all the Camera Servers in the
Recording Schedule tab under the Settings screen.
6
After deleting schedules, stop the Storage Server from the Storage Server
Configuration window.
7
Restore video data files matching the date and time you want to play back to the
former location. The default location is as follows:
<Save video in>: \WebView-NVR\videofiles
8
Restore event data files matching the date and time you want to play back to the
former location. The default location is as follows:
<Save video in>: \WebView-NVR\eventfiles
9
10
238
Start the Storage Server from the Storage Server Configuration window.
Also check that restored video data is played back correctly.
Restoration Procedure
●
Notes on Restoring Data from Backup for Data Archiving
When restoring the configuration file, also the old recording setting information is
restored as well. After restoration, the PC may start recording video according to the old
recording schedule. If you do not want to record video, delete the recording schedules
after restoration.
If the Maximum retained history setting is used on the Storage Server, uncheck this
option. If this option is enabled, the past data may be lost.
Y
P
O
C
7
Backup Scheme
239
Examples
Configuration 1: Backup for Data Protection 1
Premise
5 units of VB-C50i
Recording condition
Frame rate is 1 fps (one frame per second), Camera Server video quality is 50, resolution
is 320x240, the size for one image data is 15 KB.
The Maximum file size/duration option in the Storage Server Configuration window is
set to six hours.
Y
P
O
C
Under this condition, the video file size per Camera Server per day is 310 MB x 4 files.
Therefore, the video data quantity per Camera Server per day is 1.25 GB and 6.25 GB for
five Camera Servers.
Hardware requirement
6.25 GB per day x 30 days = 190 GB
Hard disk capacity of around 240 GB is required.
If the storage period of video data on the Storage Server is 30 days, an archive backup for
1-week data can be saved on 50-GB tape with an AIT drive. To save 30-day data on a
single cassette of tape, a 200-GB LTO drive is necessary.
Configuration 2: Backup for Data Protection 2
Premise
10 units of VB-C50i
Recording condition
Frame rate is 1 fps (one frame per second), Camera Server video quality is 50, resolution
is 320x240, and the size for one image data is 15 KB.
The Maximum file size/duration option in the Storage Server Configuration window is
set to six hours.
Under this condition, the video file size per Camera Server per day is 310 MB x 4 files.
Therefore, the video data quantity per Camera Server per day is 1.25 GB and 12.5 GB for
ten Camera Servers.
240
Examples
Hardware requirement
12.5 GB per day x 30 days = 375 GB
Hard disk capacity of around 450 GB is required.
If the storage period of video data on the Storage Server is 30 days, and the required
archive period is 180 days, an archive backup for 1-week data can be saved on 100-GB
tape with an LTO drive (Ultrium). If you use a 400-GB LTO drive, you can save 30-day
data on a single cassette of tape.
Configuration 3: Backup for Data Archiving
Premise
5 units of VB-C50i
Y
P
O
C
Recording condition
Frame rate is 1 fps (one frame per second), Camera Server video quality is 50, resolution
is 320x240, and the size for one image data is 15 KB.
The Maximum file size/duration option in the Storage Server Configuration window is
set to six hours.
Under this condition, the video file size per Camera Server per day is 310 MB x 4 files.
Therefore, the video data quantity per Camera Server per day is 1.25 GB and 6.25 GB for
five Camera Servers.
Hardware requirement
6.25 GB per day x 30 days = 190 GB
Hard disk capacity of around 240 GB is required.
7
Backup Scheme
If the storage period of video data on the Storage Server is 30 days, and the required
archive period is 180 days, an archive backup for 1-week data can be saved on 50-GB
tape with an AIT drive. If you use a 100-GB LTO drive, you can save 1-week backup data.
However, if the tape capacity for archive is too large, we should consider that it takes too
long to find desired data from the restored data.
241
Examples
Configuration 4: Backup from Multiple Storage Servers
(Backup for Data Protection)
Premise
100 units of VB-C50i
Recording condition
Frame rate is 1 fps (one frame per second), Camera Server video quality is 50, resolution
is 320x240, and the size for one image data is 15 KB.
Twenty Camera Servers are registered in five Storage Servers to record video.
Y
P
O
C
The Maximum file size/duration option in the Storage Server Configuration window is
set to six hours.
Under this condition, the video file size per Camera Server per day is 310 MB x 4 files.
Therefore, the video data quantity per Camera Server per day is 1.25 GB and 25 GB for
twenty Camera Servers.
Hardware requirement
25 GB per day x 30 days = 750 GB
Ten servers is required (for each Hard disk
capacity of 900 GB or more).
In this case, it is ideal to prepare one backup device for each server for backup. If you use
a 400-GB LTO drive, you can save 2-week data on a single cassette of tape. Alternatively,
you can prepare two or three servers dedicated for backup, and use network backup for
central management.
242
Chapter 8
Y
P
O
C
System Maintenance
Chapter Overview
This chapter describes about the version upgrade, reinstallation and restoration of the
older version for VK-64/VK-16, and about the version upgrade of cameraÅfs firmware.
Y
P
O
C
244
Upgrade VK-64/VK-16
This section describes how to upgrade previous versions of VK-64/VK-16.
1
2
System Maintenance
●
8
Upgrade from Version1.0
Obtain the released version of v2.0 (you cannot use the upgrade program).
Back up the following folders that are in the Storage Server of v1.0.
<Installation folder for VK-64> \NVR\1.0\conf
Y
P
O
C
<<Example>> C:\Program Files\Canon\Webview\NVR\1.0\conf
<All drives> :\WebView-NVR”
Please note that the capacity of this folder is large.
3
Install the new version.
If a failure occurs, restore the previous version by following “Procedure for Restoring
Previous Version” (➝ p. 248).
●
1
Upgrade from v1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4
Obtain the v2.0 upgrade program (free program).
Available from Canon Web site.
2
Back up the following folders that are in the Storage Servers of v1.1, v1.2, v1.3 and
v1.4.
Configuration file path for OS other than Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS> :\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
Canon\Webview\NVR
<All drives> :\WebView-NVR”
Configuration file path for Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>:\ProgramData\Canon\WebView\NVR\
<All drives >:\WebView-NVR"
3
Install the new version by following the upgrade procedure described at our
WebView Product web page.
If a failure occurs, restore the previous version by following “Procedure for Restoring
Previous Version” (➝ P. 248).
245
Upgrade VK-64/VK-16
Note
●
1
2
When upgrading your PC to Windows Vista, first upgrade the
software to v2.0 before upgrading to Windows Vista.
If you are using VK-64/VK-16 with NAS server, you need to set
up log-on settings again after upgrading VK from v1.3 and v1.4
to v2.0.
Version upgrade from VK-Lite
First, you need to buy VK-64/VK-16 v2.0 (there are no upgrade program available).
Y
P
O
C
Back up following folders of the VK-Lite storage server.
For OS other than Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
Canon\WebView\NVR
<All drives>:\WebView-NVR"
For Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>:\ProgramData\Canon\Webview\NVR
<All drives>:\WebView-NVR"
246
3
Uninstall VK-Lite in Add or Remove Programs in Control Panel (Uninstall a program
or Programs and Features in Windows Vista).
4
Install VK-64/VK-16 v2.0. If it failed, follow the instruction in “Procedure for Restoring
Previous Version” (➝ P.248) to restore VK-Lite.
Reinstall VK-64/VK-16
You cannot reinstall the software if you use the upgrade program.
8
When You Have the Released Version
2
System Maintenance
1
Uninstall v2.0.
Back up the following folders that are in the Storage Servers of v1.1, v1.2, v1.3 and
v1.4.
Configuration file path for OS other than Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
Canon\Webview\NVR
<All drives> :\WebView-NVR
Y
P
O
C
Configuration file path for Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>:\ProgramData\Canon\WebView\NVR\
<All drives>:\WebView-NVR"
3
Install the new version by following the upgrade procedure described at our
WebView Product web page.
If a failure occurs, restore the previous version by following “Procedure for Restoring
Previous Version” (➝ P.248).
When You Do Not Have the Released Version 2.0
1
2
3
Uninstall v2.0.
Install the previous version.
Obtain the v2.0 upgrade program (free program).
Available from Canon Web site.
4
Execute the v2.0 upgrade program.
Tip
When You Want to Perform the Full New Installation
If you have removed the application from Programs and Features
in the Control Panel, the application folder, including its setting
files and recorded data, remains undeleted. To delete all these
files, delete all the following folders.
<System drive> :\Program Files\Canon\Webview\NVR
<System drive> :\Webview-NVR (storage folder for recorded
and event data)
<System drive> :\Documents and Settings\All Users\
Application Data\Canon\WebView\NVR (storage folder for
setting files)
247
Procedure for Restoring Previous Version
Required Media and Data
Make sure that you have the installation CD, patch installer and backed-up data for the
previous version.
1
2
Delete Canon Network Video Recorder VK Series v2.0 from Add or Remove
Programs in Control Panel.
Delete the following folders.
Configuration file path for OS other than Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
Canon\Webview\NVR
<All drives> :\WebView-NVR
Y
P
O
C
Configuration file path for Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>:\ProgramData\Canon\WebView\NVR\
<All drives>:\WebView-NVR"
3
4
Install the previous version by using the installation CD and patch installer for the
previous version.
Stop the Storage Server in the Storage Server configuration.
Quit the Viewer.
5
Replace the existing folders with the following backed-up data.
In case of Version 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4
Configuration file path for OS other than Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Canon\Webview\NVR
Configuration file path for Windows Vista
<Startup drive for OS>: \ProgramData\Canon\WebView\NVR\
In case of Version 1.0
<Installation folder for VK-64/VK-16> \NVR\1.0\conf
<<Example>> C:\Program Files\Canon\WebView\NVR\1.0\conf
6
248
Start up the Storage Server.
Camera Server Maintenance
The information about the latest firmware and backup/restore tools can be obtained on
Canon Web site.
8
System Maintenance
Procedure for Updating Camera Firmware
When updating firmware, use proper tools for each model.
1
Obtain the latest firmware including the firmware update tool as well as backup and
restore tools for configured values.
2
Save the values configured in the Camera Server by using the backup tool for
configured values.
3
Y
P
O
C
Perform the Firmware update by using the firmware update tool.
If a failure occurs in step 3, restore the settings by using the restore tool for
configured values.
249
Y
P
O
C
250
Chapter 9
Y
P
O
C
Troubleshooting
Chapter Overview
This chapter explains the chart of countermeasures against failures, measures to be taken
when a trouble occurs (troubleshooting), error messages, and log files.
Y
P
O
C
252
Troubleshooting for Recording
When a recording trouble occurs when playing back recorded vide data (e.g., data is not
found), you can guess the cause by checking the Event Logs of the VK-64/VK-16 and
Storage Server Log (re_log) .
Event
Log
Storage Server
Cause
Error No.
Description
Countermeasure
ERROR (connect) : socket type=
(IMAGE/EVENT/COMMAND),
cameraserver= (<host>:<port>)
win32_error= (<Winsock Error
Code>:<Error Message>)
Effective recording
rate (<Recording rate
before change> ➝
<Recording rate after
change> %)
Ex. Effective recording
rate (100➝90.0%)
Camera <camera> Effective recording
rate (y%->z%)
N/A
Camera <camera>: <x>/<y> frames
discarded due to busy drive thread in
last 1 minutes.
Load due to writing recorded video
data onto HDD may be too high.
Use the Windows’ Performance
Monitor to check the writing status of
HDD. Review the recording
schedule or add servers as required.
N/A
Camera <camera>: <x>/<y> frames
discarded due to busy frame queue in
last 1 minutes.
CPU load of the Storage Server PC
may be too high.
· Use the Task Manager to find out
the application causing the problem.
· If the VK-64/VK-16 module
(AE.EXE) is causing the problem,
the event generation frequency
may be too high. Try the following:
- Shorten the Maximum retained
history setting for the recorded data
- Reduce the number of events to
generate
- Add servers to distribute the load.
N/A
Error writing frame for camera <camera>:
<error message>
· The specified drive may be unable to
be written.
· The time setting of the VK-64/VK-16
Storage Server PC may have been
changed to the past (in the NTP
operation environment).
· Check the drive for recording
video data.
· If you are using NTP to adjust time,
shorten the synchronization interval
with NTP (e.g., 7 days ➝ 1 day).
Load due to writing recorded video
data onto HDD may be too high.
Shorten the Maximum retained
history or add HDD. Also, review
the recording schedule.
10050
Network may be out
of service.
A Camera Server’s
10054
network problem or
10060
session
disconnection due to
10061
Camera Server’s
10064
reboot has occurred.
The effective recording rate is too low
(below 50 %).
· Sensor and motion detection events
occur too frequently, exceeding the
standard given by the guideline.
· CPU load of the Storage Server PC
may be high.
9
Check the network (HUB, cables,
etc.) for any problem and confirm
that the Camera Server is
operating normally.
Troubleshooting
Connection to
<Camera Server’s IP
address> error: Error
occurred (<Error No.>:
<Description>)
Ex. Connection to
192.168.100.1 error:
Error occurred (10060:
Connection time-out)
Y
P
O
C
If the following message is also
recorded, a large amount of captured
data may have been discarded:
· Camera <camera>: <x>/<y> frames
discarded due to busy frame queue in
last 1 minutes.
If the following messages are also
recorded, a large amount of captured
data may have been discarded:
· Adjust the recording schedule and
sensitivity of motion detection.
· Check the CPU usage and
terminate any applications which
are putting heavy loads to the CPU.
· Camera <camera>: <x>/<y> frames
discarded due to busy frame queue in
last 1 minutes.
· Camera <camera>: <x>/<y> frames
discarded due to busy drive thread in
last 1 minutes.
Recording to E:\drive is on
standby due to shortage
of free HDD space.
No Storage Server Log
253
VK Troubleshooting
Viewing Screen and Video Windows
This section describes how to solve problems that may occur when you are using VK64/VK-16.
Some of the thumbnails are not showing in the Camera Selection Area.
Situation
You do not have enough thumbnails on display to make the scrollbar appear,
but some of the thumbnails that were displayed before are no longer shown.
Solution
Most likely you have selected another Zone or Location from the drop-down
menu that is further down the list and the thumbnails have been scrolled to the
left to show the selected Zone (➝ P. 187). Check the selected Location and
Zone.
Y
P
O
C
Cannot Pan, Tilt or Zoom a Camera Server in a Video Window.
Situation
You have clicked a Video Window to get Camera Server control, but the shape
of the mouse cursor is not changed to operate the Camera Server.
Solution
Double-click the Video Window or select Get Camera Control from the Video
Window menu (➝ P. 194). Alternatively, check whether recorded video is not
being played. If video is not being played, the title bar of the Video Window will
be gray, not black (➝ P. 193).
The Record Now feature is gray and disabled in one Video Window menu, however it is
enabled in other Video Window menus.
Situation
You have clicked a Video Window to display a Video Window menu and
Record Now is gray (disabled). However, other Video Windows have the
function enabled.
Solution
Check if a Camera Server in the Video Window has the setting that disables
recording (when the Camera Server was configured, Do not Record was
selected).
Layouts set up by another user cannot be seen.
254
Situation
In the Organize Layouts & Layout Sequences dialog, you have clicked in
the Personal Layouts folder in order to open a Layout created by another
user.
Solution
Layouts saved in the Personal Layouts folder cannot be seen by other users.
To show a created Layout to all users, it should be created by a user with
Administrator privileges and saved to the Shared Layouts folder (➝ P. 172).
VK Troubleshooting
Live and recorded video is not good quality (this does not relate to Resolution).
In a Video Window, the live video quality is lower than that of another Video
Window and recorded video (when you play back video) is also not good
quality.
Solution
The quality of live and recorded video cannot be changed in VK-64/VK-16. The
video quality may vary from one Video Window to another because of Camera
Server settings. The quality can be changed to a higher one in the admin
screens of Camera Servers.
9
Troubleshooting
Situation
Recording cannot be performed.
Y
P
O
C
Situation1) Recording cannot be performed by all of the network cameras.
Situation2) Recording cannot be performed by a certain network camera.
Solution
In the case of 1), check the following:
• The network cable of the server is plugged in.
• The power supply has been cut off.
• Do not Record is not specified in the Special Day Schedule settings and
others.
• Link lamps on the hub (switch) and on the network connector for the server
are on.
➝If the lamps are off, there may be defects in the cable, hub (switch), or
network connector for the server.
In the case of 2), check the following:
• The power source or network of the Camera Server have no problem.
• The ping command succeeds for the network camera.
• You can view live video of the Camera Server using VB-C60 Viewer, NC
Viewer, PC Viewer or other viewers.
• Do not Record is specified in the Special Day Schedule settings and others.
• Sensor recording or motion detection recording is set or not.
255
VK Troubleshooting
Cannot log into a Storage Server from a Viewer.
Situation
You cannot log into a Storage Server from a Viewer.
Solution
Check the following:
• The login user name and password are correct.
• The network between the server and the Viewer has no problem.
• The IP address of the server to which you want to login is correct.
• The ping command succeeds for the server from the Viewer.
• When the proxy is configured in Internet Explorer, change the settings to
exclude the VK server.
Y
P
O
C
Cannot view live video.
Situation
You cannot view live video.
Solution
Check the following:
• If “Could not connect to camera” is displayed in the Video Window, check
whether the power source of the Camera Server and the network have no
problem.
• An error is displayed in the Timeline in the Viewer.
➝ If “Connect to <Camera Server IP Address>: Error Occurred” is displayed,
check whether the power source of the Camera Server and the network
have no problem.
• The screen goes black when layout is switched, but video is displayed after
a few seconds.
➝ Too many Camera Servers that exceed the performance of your PC are
displayed in the Viewer, or a live frame rate that exceeds the performance
of your PC is set. Reduce the number of Camera Servers to be displayed,
or decrease the live frame rate.
When a layout sequence is running in the Viewer, the Video Window suddenly goes
black and video of the Camera Server cannot be displayed.
256
Situation
When a layout sequence is running, the Video Window goes black and video
of the Camera Server cannot be displayed.
Solution
When many Camera Servers are placed in one layout and a layout sequence
is run in a short time, system resources required for communication may run
short. Reduce the number of Camera Servers to be displayed in a layout, or
make the switching interval for layout sequences longer.
VK Troubleshooting
Viewer operation seems to slow down.
Viewer operation slows down.
Solution
The performance of a Viewer depends largely on CPU specifications and
graphics specifications of the PC on which the Viewer is installed. When
Viewer operation slows down, try to reduce the number of Camera Servers to
be displayed or decrease a live frame rate. If the video quality of Camera
Servers is set high or the resolution is set to VGA, processing may take a long
time because the size of image data is large. In this case, review the video
quality or video size in the Camera Server settings.
Timeline
9
Troubleshooting
Situation
Y
P
O
C
The Playback controls are inactive.
Situation
You have clicked any of the Playback controls but nothing happens.
Solution
Move the Playhead away from the Live position. Playback controls will then be
active. A Video Window needs to be selected for playback. Also, the nudge
buttons (➝ P. 204) and the Extract Video button (➝ P. 211) are enabled only
when one Video Window is selected.
Extract Video
Cannot save video as no data could be found.
Situation
You have attempted to extract video, but an error message appears stating
that no video can be found in the selected segment.
Solution
Check that the selected segment of video has recorded footage (➝ P. 210).
Scheduling and Recording
Cannot initiate Record Now on a camera.
Situation
You have selected a Video Window to initiate Record Now, but the menu
option is not available.
Solution
In the Edit Camera Server dialog of the Configuration and Preferences
screen, Do not Record is probably set for the Camera Server. Change the
option to enable recording to the Storage Server (➝ P. 95).
257
VK Troubleshooting
Cannot configure the Camera Server not to record.
Situation
You have attempted to modify the Camera Server and set Do not Record in
the Edit Camera Server dialog. A message appears stating that the Camera
Server is already set up without recording settings.
Solution
In the Camera Server list displayed on the Locations/Zones tab of the
Storage and Camera Server Summary screen, the selected Camera Server
probably has more than one listing. Click the listing which has an associated
Storage Server listed beside it and then click Remove Camera Server. Make
sure you save your changes to permanently remove the deleted Camera
Server.
Y
P
O
C
Storage Server free disk space is extremely low.
Situation
Storage Server disk usage is far in excess of the calculated level (➝ P. 31, 64)
and there is little free space.
Solution
When the Camera Server video quality is set high, there is a large amount of
data per frame. Also, if you are using anti-virus software, communication
between Storage Servers and Camera Servers is being recorded and that file
may be several gigabytes in size. Please alter the anti-virus software settings
to eliminate Storage Servers from virus scanning targets.
Connection Problems
Cannot connect to a Camera Server.
Situation
In the Viewer the screen has gone black and a message appears stating
“Could not connect to camera”.
Solution
Check whether the network is down, whether the physical connection to the
Camera Server is broken, or whether the camera is not powered.
Cannot connect to a Master Storage Server.
Situation
You have attempted to launch the Viewer and a connection to the Master
Storage Server error message appears.
Solution
Check whether the specified Master Storage Server works properly. On the
Storage Server computer, open the Storage Server Configuration utility. If
the Storage Server is not running, click Start Storage Server (➝ P. 61).
The Configuration and Preferences screen takes a long time to open.
258
Situation
When you switch from the Viewing Screen to the Configuration and
Preferences screen, a message “Please wait” appears and remains on screen
for a while.
Solution
Check whether you do not have a lot of Camera Servers to disconnect.
Waiting time is dependent on the time required for disconnecting from each
Camera Server on the network. It is recommended that you remove nonessential or low priority Camera Servers from your Viewing Screen.
VK Troubleshooting
Fails to connect to Storage Servers when switching to the Configuration and
Preferences screen.
You have attempted to switch to the Configuration and Preferences screen
and an error message appears stating a failure to connect to a particular
Storage Server (name), although it can still connect to the Master Storage
Server.
Solution
Check whether the specified Storage Server works properly. A network error
may have caused this situation.
9
Troubleshooting
Situation
Configuration Problems
Cannot switch to the Configuration and Preferences screen.
Y
P
O
C
Situation
You have attempted to switch from the Viewing Screen to the Configuration
and Preferences screen and an error message appears.
Solution
Only Administrators can access the Configuration and Preferences screen.
Check whether you have Administrator privileges.
Camera Servers are not displayed in the Camera Summary window.
Situation
In the list of Camera Servers on the Camera Summary window, some of the
Camera Servers are not displayed.
Solution
Only Camera Servers associated with the item selected on the Storage
Server tab or the Locations/Zones tab will be shown in the list. Also, if you
have the Storage Server tab displayed, Camera Servers configured as Do
not Record will not be shown.
Upgrade Problems
Software cannot be upgraded to v2.0.
Situation
When you try to upgrade the software from v1.1, 1.2 or v1.3 to v2.0 after
upgrading your OS to Windows Vista, the Storage Server does not stop and
installation cannot be completed.
Solution
Follow the procedure below:
1. Right click on the Storage Server Configuration icon on the desktop, then
choose Properties.
2. Click the Compatibility tab and check the Run this program as an
administrator check box.
3. Double click the Storage Server Configuration icon to start the Storage
Server Configuration tool.
4. Click the Stop Storage Server button in the Storage server status field.
5. Click the Retry button on the installer wizard for VK version 2.0.
259
Messages List
Operation Messages and Error Messages
Error messages and operation messages displayed during normal recording and operation
of VK-64/VK-16 are shown below.
Video Windows Error Messages
Video window
Messages
Cause
Connecting to camera.
The viewer is in the process of
connecting to the camera.
Could not connect to camera.
The viewer cannot connect to the
camera server and the live video
cannot be displayed.
Y
P
O
C
260
Getting camera control.
The message is displayed before
starting camera control after sending a
camera control request.
Can't get camera control.
Another user with higher user authority
has already been controlling the
camera when you sent a camera
control request.
Control will be lost in {count down}
sec.
If the camera is left uncontrolled for
30 seconds, this message is
displayed and a countdown starts. It
counts down starting from 10 to 0 by
1 second.
Camera control lost.
Time out occurred while the viewer is
controlling the camera or a camera
control request was sent from
another user with higher user
authority. This message will close in
three seconds.
No recorded video.
No recorded video exists during the
time where the Playhead is
positioned now, when playing
recorded video.
Can't connect to storage server.
It is unable to connect to the storage
server to play recorded video.
Not set up to record.
You attempted to play recorded video
with the camera set to “Do not
Record”
Please wait···
It may take time until the MPEG-4
live/recorded video is displayed. This
message will close in several
seconds.
Messages List
Storage Server Configuration Error Messages
Login settings
Cause
This account does not have the
right to logon as services.\nPlease
check the rights by the “Local
Security Policy Editor” of
“Windows”.\nThe service’s account
is changed to “Local system
account”.
You logged in using an account that
does not have administrator
privileges.
The address of the recipient
contains an invalid character.
A character other than alphanumeric
characters and underscore (_) was
entered in the address of the recipient.
Specify the address of the recipient.
The address of the recipient was not
entered.
The address of the sender contains
an invalid character.
A character other than alphanumeric
characters and underscore (_) was
entered in the address of the sender.
Specify the address of the sender.
The address of the sender was not
entered.
The host name of the SMTP server
contains an invalid character.
The host name of the SMTP server
contains an invalid character.
Specify the host name of the SMTP
server.
The host name of the SMTP server
was not entered.
Specify the port of the SMTP server
using a number in the range of 1 to
65535.
The port number of an invalid SMTP
server was used.
Specify the user name using 1 - 100
characters.
The user name was out of the valid
number of characters range (This
includes when the user name was
not entered).
The user name contains an invalid
character.
An invalid character was entered in
the user name.
9
Troubleshooting
Event
notification
Messages
Y
P
O
C
261
Messages List
Event
notification
User
management
Configuration
262
Messages
Cause
Specify the password using 1 - 20
characters.
The password was out of the valid
number of characters range (This
includes when the password was not
entered).
The password contains an invalid
character.
An invalid character was entered in
the password. Only alphanumeric
characters and underscore (_) can be
used.
The host name of the POP server
contains an invalid character.
An invalid character was entered in
the host name of the POP server.
Specify the host name of the POP
server.
The host name of the POP server
was not entered.
Specify the port of the POP server
using a number in the range of 1 to
65535.
The port number of an invalid POP
server was used.
This user name cannot be used
because it already exists.
An attempt was made to add a user
in the Storage Server by using a user
name that is already registered.
The user name contains an invalid
character.
An attempt was made to add a user
by entering a user name that
contains a character other than
alphanumeric characters and
underscore (_).
The password contains an invalid
character. Only alphanumeric
characters and underscore (_) can
be used.
An attempt was made to add a user
by entering a password that contains
a character other than alphanumeric
characters and underscore (_).
The password (confirmation) does
not match.
An attempt was made to add a user
by entering a password in the
Confirm Password field, which does
not match the entered password.
Are you sure you want to delete this
user?
An attempt was made to delete the
user.
Specify the Storage Server name
using 1 - 20 characters.
The Storage Server name was out of
the valid number of characters range
(This includes when the Storage
Server name was not entered).
Specify the host name of the proxy
server.
The host name of the proxy server
was not entered.
Y
P
O
C
Messages List
Configuration
Cause
The host name of the proxy server
contains an invalid character.
The host name of an invalid proxy
server was used.
Specify the port of the proxy server
using a number in the range of 1 to
65535.
The port number of an invalid proxy
server was used.
The proxy settings have changed.
Do you wish to restart the recording
server?
The proxy server settings have
changed.
9
Troubleshooting
Messages
Y
P
O
C
When exiting the
application or
approving the
change in all tabs
Specify the maximum retention
period.
The value of the maximum retention
period was not entered.
Specify one or more days for the
maximum retention period.
An attempt was made to configure
the maximum retention period using
a value of less than 1 day.
Specify the maximum file
size/duration.
The value of the maximum file
size/duration was not entered.
Specify 1024MB or less for the
maximum file size.
An attempt was made to configure
the maximum file size using a value
larger than 1024MB.
Specify 32MB or more for the
maximum file size.
An attempt was made to configure
the maximum file size using a value
less than 32MB.
Specify 24 hours or less for the
maximum file duration.
An attempt was made to configure
the maximum file duration using a
value larger than 24 hours.
Specify 1 hour or longer for the
maximum file duration.
An attempt was made to configure
the maximum file size using a value
less than 1 hour.
Specify the maximum disk space
used.
The value of the maximum disk
space used was not entered.
Specify 32MB or more for the
maximum disk space used.
An attempt was made to configure
the maximum disk space used using
a value less than 32MB.
Specify the notification settings for
the low disk space warning level.
The value of the low disk space
warning level was not entered.
An error occurred in the
configuration file
An error occurred while saving the
Storage Server settings.
263
Messages List
When exiting the
application or
approving the
change in all tabs
All tabs
Messages
Cause
An error occurred while writing the
user file
An error occurred while saving the
user management information (the
users.txt file).
When you change the retention period,
the recorded video may be deleted.
Are you sure you want to continue?
The maximum retention period was
changed to a shorter period.
Are you sure you want to save the
changes?
An attempt was made to exit the
application without saving the setting
change.
Y
P
O
C
Initialization of network
communication failed.
Communication initialization was
interfered with due to an internal
program or OS error that occurred
when the Storage Server installation
was activated.
Confirmation Messages of Viewer
The ‘ ’ part of the message differs depending on the situation.
Registering
Storage Servers
and Camera
Servers
Another Add
Camera Server
dialog
Saving/Managing
Video Layouts
264
Messages
Cause
Are you sure you want to delete this
camera server ‘camera server
name’?
An attempt was made to delete the
camera server.
All schedules configured for the
‘camera number’ will be deleted.
Select “Yes” to continue, or select
“No” to cancel.
When you attempted to edit the
VB150 settings, it was detected that
the camera configuration has been
changed on the VB150 side and the
camera for which the schedule was
configured no longer exists.
A layout with the same name is
already registered. Are you sure
you want to overwrite?
An attempt was made to save the
current layout using the same name
as a layout that already exists.
Are you sure you want to delete the
following layout?
‘Layout name’
An attempt was made to delete the
layout.
Are you sure you want to delete the
following folder with the layouts in
the folder?
‘Folder name’
An attempt was made to delete the
layout folder.
Messages List
Viewer Warning Messages
Add Recording
Schedule
Preset Tour
Settings
Cause
The audio transmission function of
the camera is not effective. Please
confirm the setting of the camera.
The audio transmission function of
the camera is disabled.
A setup of the stream for recording
is applied only to the JPEG
recording not more than maximum
frame rate 10fps.
it is applied to neither JPEG
recording of 10 or more fps nor
MPEG-4 recording.
You attempted to apply video
recording stream settings to high rate
JPEG video or MPEG-4 video.
MPEG-4 recording with Preset Tour
could consume disk space rapidly.
Do you wish to continue?
The data volume of MPEG-4 video
becomes several times bigger if the
video contains a lot of motion of
subjects. You need attention when
using Preset Tour together with
MPEG-4 recording, as a whole image
moves during Preset Tour.
The motion detection setting tool
cannot be started because the user
of the camera is not a manager.
A non-Administrator user attempted
to start up the Motion Detection
Setting dialog.
Attention:
The current Preset Tour settings
might require you to repair the
Pan/Tilt machine soon.
Please note that the repair of
consumable mechanical parts such
as the Pan/Tilt machine may not be
covered by the guarantee.
Recommended Preset Tour settings
to reduce the machine load:
- Change the Preset Tour duration
within {hh} : {nn} at the [Start
Time] and [End Time] setting.
- Adjust the Preset Tour
configuration so that the total
amount of camera movement
(angle/time) becomes small.
- Set the pause time to the preset
position longer than the Pause
(sec) setting.
Click the [Cancel] button to return to
the setting screen.
The configured settings exceed the
endurance limit of 100,000 pans and
tilts (300,000 for the VB-C60) within
one year on the VB-C50i or VBC300.
9
Troubleshooting
Motion Detection
Dialog
Messages
Y
P
O
C
265
Messages List
Error Messages of Viewer
The ‘ ’ part of the message differs depending on the situation.
Starting the
Viewer
Messages
Cause
Connection to the Master Storage
Server failed. Check the settings
and try again.
An attempt was made to start the
Viewer, however a connection to the
specified Master Storage Server
could not be established.
Failed to connect to Master Storage
Server ‘IP address of Storage
Server’ because of version
mismatch.
You attempted to connect to an older
version (V1.1 or earlier) of the
Storage Server as the Master
Storage Server. Alternately, you
attempted to connect to a V2.0
Master Storage Server from an older
version (V1.2, V1.3, or V1.4) Viewer.
Recording settings for camera
servers will not be available on the
storage server ‘Storage Server
Name’. Version mismatch.
You attempted to connect to an older
version (V1.1 or earlier) of the
Storage Server as a Slave Storage
Server. Alternately, you attempted to
connect an older version (V1.2, V1.3,
or V1.4) Viewer to a V2.0 Slave
Storage Server.
Failed to connect to Storage Server
‘Storage Server Name’. Recording
settings for camera servers will not
be available on the storage server
‘Storage Server Name’.
You attempted to connect a V1.0 VK
Viewer to a V2.0 Slave Storage
Server.
Recording settings for camera
servers will not be available on the
storage server ‘Storage Server
Name’. HTTP error 505.
You attempted to connect a V1.1 VK
Viewer to a V2.0 Slave Storage
Server.
The configuration window can only
be used by administrators.
An attempt was made by a user
without the administrator privilege to
switch to the Configuration window.
The recording settings of the
camera server cannot be configured
for this Storage Server ‘Storage
Server name’.
‘Cause of the error’
A connection to a Storage Server
other than the Master Storage Server
failed when you accessed the
Configuration and Preferences
screen.
The changes cannot be saved
because it cannot be sent to
‘Storage Server name’.
An attempt was made to save the
changes in the Camera Server list in
the Configuration and Preferences
screen, however a connection to the
Storage Server could not be
established.
Y
P
O
C
Configuration
and Preferences
screen
266
Messages List
Configuration
and Preferences
screen
Adding/Editing a
Location and
Zone
Cause
The changes to the thumbnail,
location and zone were not saved
because the Master Storage Server
settings have been changed by
another administrator. Restart the
Viewer.
An attempt was made to save the
changes in the Camera Server list,
however another administrator has
conducted changes.
The Master Storage Server settings
have been changed by another
administrator. Restart the Viewer.
Another administrator changed the
Master Storage Server settings while
the Camera Server list was
displayed.
9
Troubleshooting
Adding/Editing/
Deleting the
Storage Server
Messages
Y
P
O
C
This host name or IP address
cannot be specified.
An attempt was made to register a
Storage Server by specifying a loop
back host/address (“local host”,
“127.0.0.1” or
“localhostlocaldomain”).
This Storage Server is already
registered. Check the settings and
try again.
An attempt was made to add a
Storage Server that has been already
registered.
The Master Storage Server cannot
be changed here.
An attempt was made to edit the
Master Storage Server.
The camera server settings have
not been saved. Save or delete the
settings before changing the
Storage Server settings.
An attempt was made to
change/delete the Storage Server
while there are camera server
settings that have not been saved.
The Master Storage Server cannot
be deleted.
An attempt was made to delete the
Master Storage Server.
The host name of the Storage
Server is invalid. Check the host
name or IP address.
The host name or IP address was
invalid when OK was pressed.
The port number of the Storage
Server is invalid. Specify a number
in the range of 1 to 65535.
The port number was invalid when
OK was pressed.
Specify the host name of the
Storage Server.
An attempt was made to add or edit a
zone in the Storage Server without
entering the name.
This location name cannot be used
because it already exists.
An attempt was made to register a
location name that is already
registered.
The location name is not specified.
An attempt was made to register a
location without entering the name.
267
Messages List
Adding/Editing a
Location and
Zone
Adding a
Camera Server
268
Messages
Cause
Delete the added zone before
deleting the location.
An attempt was made to delete the
location for which a zone has been
added.
Select a location.
An attempt was made to add a zone
while the location has not been
registered.
This zone name cannot be used
because it already exists.
An attempt was made to add a zone
with a name that has been already
registered.
Y
P
O
C
The zone name is not specified.
An attempt was made to register a
zone without entering the name.
Delete the added camera server
before deleting the zone.
An attempt was made to delete the
zone for which a camera server has
been added.
The recording settings of this
camera server have already been
configured in the selected Storage
Server. Check the settings and try
again.
Even though video of a camera
server is configured to be recorded in
the Storage Server, the IP address
and port used are the same as the
camera server that has been
configured in the Storage Server.
Select a location and zone.
An attempt was made to add a
camera server without selecting a
location and zone.
Select a location and zone. ‘Camera
number’
An attempt was made to add a
camera server without selecting a
location and zone. This is displayed
when VB150 is in the “simultaneous”
mode and multiple cameras are
connected.
The camera server with the same
host name and port number is being
deleted. Save the changes and add
the server again.
After deleting the camera server, an
attempt was made to add the camera
server again when the changes have
not been saved.
The host name specified in
“Connection Settings” is invalid.
Check the host name or IP address.
An attempt was made to connect with
an invalid host name/IP address.
The port number specified in
“Connection Settings” is invalid.
Specify a number within the range
of 1 and 65535.
An attempt was made to connect with
an invalid port number.
Messages List
Adding a
Camera Server
原因
Cause
The host name specified in
“Storage Server Configuration” is
invalid. Check the host name or IP
address.
An attempt was made to connect to
the Storage Server with an invalid
host name/IP address.
The port number specified in
“Storage Server Configuration” is
invalid. Specify a number within the
range of 1 and 65535.
An attempt was made to connect to
the Storage Server with an invalid
port number.
An error occurred relating to the
schedule change of ‘schedule
name’ for the camera ‘camera
name’ registered in the Storage
Server ‘Storage Server name’. This
change will not be reflected on the
Storage Server side.
The destination Storage Server was
not found when you attempted to
save the schedule.
An error occurred relating to the
schedule deletion of ‘schedule
name’ for the camera ‘camera
name’ registered in the Storage
Server ‘Storage Server name’. This
change will not be reflected on the
Storage Server side.
The destination Storage Server was
not found when you attempted to
delete the schedule.
An error occurred when you
obtained the schedule setting
information of the Storage Server
‘Storage Server name’. This change
will not be reflected on the Storage
Server side.
The Storage Server in which the
schedule is to be saved was not
found when you attempted to display
the Recording Schedules window or
to switch the Storage Server.
This schedule overlaps with other
schedule. Check the settings and
try again.
The recording schedules are
overlapping.
For the end time of a schedule, a
time of at least 15 minutes later
than the start time must be
specified. Check the settings and try
again.
An attempt was made to register a
schedule with a shorter period than
15 minutes.
Do you want to save the change in
the recording schedule?
An attempt was made to close the
Normal or Special Day Schedule
screen without saving the change.
9
Troubleshooting
Recording
Schedule
メッセージ
Messages
Y
P
O
C
269
Messages List
Recording
Schedule
Special Day
Schedule
Viewing Screen
270
Messages
Cause
The schedule for the following
camera is not created because the
specified time frame has already
been configured for another
schedule.
The Recording Schedules window
was dragged in order to add multiple
recording schedules, however the
camera server for which a schedule
has already been configured exists.
The multiple schedules could not be
added. All of the schedules
attempted to create overlap with
other schedules.
A layout or layout sequence with the
same name exists in the folder to
which the layout or layout sequence
is moved or copied.
Y
P
O
C
At least one type of recording must
be selected.
You turned the audio recording mode
on when all of the video recording
modes were off.
If you select “Custom” in the Preset
drop-down menu, you cannot use
digital zoom.
You attempted to operate the digital
zoom region of the VB-C60 while
Custom was selected.
This special day schedule is added
with a date that uses a schedule.
Delete the date before deleting the
special day schedule.
An attempt was made to delete the
special day schedule that is planned
to execute.
This date is already used. In order
to use it in another special day
schedule, the date must be deleted
from the original special day
schedule ‘special day schedule
name’.
An attempt was made to use the data
for which another special day
schedule is already configured.
The end time of the special day
schedule cannot be set on the next
day. Check the settings and try
again.
An attempt was made to register a
schedule that passes 24:00.
This special day schedule name
cannot be used because it already
exists.
An attempt was made to add a
special day schedule with a name
that is already registered.
Communication with the Storage
Server ‘Storage Server name’ failed.
Press OK to reconnect to the Storage
Server. When Cancel is pressed, the
video information and event
information of the camera servers
registered in this Storage Server can
no longer be referred. Restart the
Viewer manually.
When displaying the Viewing Screen,
the Viewer connects to a Storage
Server. An error occurred during this
process. When multiple Storage
Servers are registered, the Viewing
Screen may be displayed for each of
the servers.
Messages List
Viewing Screen
原因
Cause
The following layout has been
deleted from the layout sequence.:
‘Layout name’
Press OK to continue the layout
sequence.
There is a layout that can only be
seen while the layout sequence is
being executed, and the user has the
right to edit the layout sequence.
The following layout cannot be
found. Contact your administrator
when deleting the layout from the
layout sequence. ‘Layout name’
Press OK to continue the layout
sequence.
The shared layout sequence was
started, however there is a layout that
cannot be seen and the user does
not have the administrator privilege.
The layouts registered in this layout
sequence cannot be found.
The shared layout sequence was
started, however there are no layouts
that can be seen and the user does
not have the administrator privilege.
The layout registered in this layout
sequence cannot be found. Press
OK to edit this layout sequence, or
press Cancel to return to the
previous layout.
The layout sequence was started,
however there are no layouts that
can be seen. The right to edit the
layout sequence is possessed.
The configuration window can only
be used by administrators.
An attempt was made by a user other
than an administrator to switch to the
Configuration window.
Do you want to save the change in
this layout?
An attempt was made to close a
layout that has been changed.
The image could not be saved.
A still image was captured using
snapshot but it could not be saved.
Nothing could be saved because no
video was recorded at the specified
time.
There are no recorded videos for the
selected segment thus they could not
be saved.
Manual recording of the camera
‘camera name’ registered in the
Storage Server ‘Storage Server
name’ could not be started.
Manual recording could not be
started.
9
Troubleshooting
メッセージ
Messages
Y
P
O
C
*The following message is added
when the number of camera
servers exceeds the licensing
restrictions.
The number of camera servers
exceeds the number allowed in the
licensing agreement.
271
Messages List
Viewing Screen
Saving/Managing
Video Layouts
Menu Buttons
Extracting Video
Adding/Editing a
Camera Server
272
Messages
Cause
The layout sequence settings will be
overwritten. Are you sure you want
to continue?
An attempt was made to save the
layout sequence with a name that is
already being used for a layout or
layout sequence in the destination
folder.
A layout with the same name is
already registered. Are you sure
you want to overwrite?
An attempt was made to save the
layout sequence in the folder using a
name that is already been registered
as a layout or layout sequence.
Y
P
O
C
The number of video windows
displaying MPEG-4 exceeds 20. Do
you change it in MPEG-4 as it is?
The number of videos where MPEG4 was selected as the Selection of
receiving image exceeds 20.
‘Layout name’ cannot be deleted
because it is currently in use.
An attempt was made to delete a
layout that is currently being used.
The name is not specified. Check
the settings and try again.
An attempt was made to add a layout
folder without entering the name.
The image could not be saved.
An error occurred when you
attempted to capture a snapshot in
the Video Window.
Nothing could be saved because no
video was recorded at the specified
time.
There are no recorded videos for the
selected segment thus they could not
be saved.
The image could not be saved.
The Windows folder or Program Files
folder was specified as the
destination folder for still frames or
MOV files.
The recording settings of this
camera server are not configured
but the server has already been
registered. Check the settings and
try again.
When a camera server configured as
Do not record is already added, an
attempt was made to add or edit a
camera server using the same hot
name/IP address and port number.
Could not connect to the camera
server. Check the entered
information.
‘Communication Error Messages Details’
Could not connect to the camera
server.
The storage server of this version
does not support the specified
camera.
You attempted to register a VB-C300
or VB-C60 with an older version of
the Storage Server.
Messages List
原因
Cause
Add/Edit Camera
Server dialog,
Add/Edit
Recording
Schedule dialog,
Motion Detection
Settings dialog,
Sensor Event
Settings dialog
The connection to the camera
server has been disconnected.
An error relating to the camera server
connection occurred.
An error relating to the camera
server connection occurred.
An unknown error relating to the
camera server connection occurred.
Add/Edit
Recording
Schedule dialog
Specify the weekday.
OK was pressed without specifying
the weekday.
Specify the recording mode.
OK was pressed without selecting
the recording mode check box.
Specify the recording frame rate
between ‘fps’ and ‘fps’.
An invalid recording frame rate was
entered.
The maximum value of the preevent recording is 30 seconds.
OK was pressed after configuring a
value exceeding 30 seconds for the
pre-event time value.
The change cannot be saved
because it cannot be sent to the
Storage Server ‘Storage Server
name’.
‘Communication Error Messages Details’
An error occurred while saving the
settings in the Camera Summary
window.
Are you sure you want to delete the
Storage Server ‘Storage Server
name’?
An attempt was made to delete a
Storage Server other than the Master
Storage Server.
Are you sure you want to delete the
location ‘location name’?
An attempt was made to delete the
location.
Are you sure you want to delete the
zone ‘zone name’?
An attempt was made to delete the
zone.
Are you sure you want to delete this
camera server ‘camera server
name’?
An attempt was made to delete the
camera server.
Do you want to save the changes in
the server registration?
An attempt was made to close the
Camera Summary window without
saving the changes.
Add/Edit
Recording
Schedule dialog,
Motion Detection
Settings dialog
Camera
Summary
window
9
Troubleshooting
メッセージ
Messages
Y
P
O
C
273
Messages List
Messages
Cause
Camera
Summary
window
An error occurred while saving the
settings in the Master Storage
Server.
An attempt was made to save the
settings, however, saving the Master
Storage Server settings failed.
Connect to
Master Storage
Server dialog,
Connection
Error dialog
The host name of the Master
Storage Server is invalid. Check the
host name or IP address.
An attempt was made to connect with
an invalid host name/IP address.
The port number of the Master
Storage Server is invalid. Specify a
number in the range of 1 and
65535.
An attempt was made to connect with
an invalid port number.
All schedules configured for the
‘camera server name’ will be
deleted. Select “Yes” to continue, or
select “No” to cancel.
OK was pressed in the Edit Camera
Server dialog when a change was
made to the camera registered in the
camera server.
There are no events.
No events to be displayed in Event
Search were found.
Specify the start time and end time
so that the time interval is 1 hour or
shorter.
An attempt was made to configure
the time using a value longer than 1
hour.
The recorded video data cannot be
read.
The recorded video at the specified
time cannot be read.
Failed to extract the video after
{hh}:{nn}:{ss} because two or more
MPEG-4 tracks are included in the
selected time period.
You attempted to use Extract Video
to save recorded video for a time
range that spans two or more MPEG4 recording schedules.
The name is not specified. Check
the settings and try again.
An attempt was made to add a layout
folder without entering the name.
Layout
Sequence dialog
A user layout cannot be specified in
shared layout sequences.
Delete the following layout before
saving the shared layout sequence.
An attempt was made to change the
layout sequence that contains a
personal layout sequence to a shared
layout sequence.
Motion Detection
Settings dialog
Specify the frame rate for the
motion detection settings between
‘fps’ and ‘fps’.
An invalid value was selected for the
motion detection frame rate.
Specify the recording frame rate
between ‘fps’ and ‘fps’.
An invalid value was selected for the
motion detection recording frame
rate.
Edit Camera
Server dialog
Event Search
dialog
Extract Video
dialog
Folder Name
dialog
274
Y
P
O
C
Messages List
原因
Cause
Normal or
Special Day
Schedule
window and
Add/Edit Camera
Server dialog
The recording settings of the
camera server cannot be configured
for this Storage Server ‘Storage
Server name’.
‘Communication Error Messages Details’
An error occurred while connecting to
the Storage Server, when the Normal
or Special Day Schedule window is
opened or the Storage Server in the
Recording Schedules window is
changed. Or, a communication error
occurred when you were
adding/editing a Storage Server.
Organize
Layouts &
Layout
Sequences
dialog
The layout that is currently being
used will be overwritten. Are you
sure you want to continue?
There is a layout with the same name
in the destination to which the layout
is moved and the name is the same
as the layout that is being currently
used.
‘Layout name’ cannot be deleted
because it is currently in use.
An attempt was made to delete the
current layout or the folder that
contains the current layout or layout
sequence.
Are you sure you want to delete the
following layout? ‘layout name’
An attempt was made to delete a
layout that is not currently being
used.
Are you sure you want to delete the
following folder with the layouts in
the folder? ‘layout name’
An attempt was made to delete the
layout folder.
Are you sure you want to delete the
layout sequence?
An attempt was made to delete the
layout sequence.
It cannot be deleted because it is
used in the running layout
sequence.
An attempt was made to delete a
layout that is registered in the current
layout sequence.
It cannot be overwritten because it
is used in the layout sequence.
An attempt was made to change or
overwrite the layout that is being
used in the currently active layout
sequence.
The folder cannot be created.
‘Folder name’ already exists.
An attempt was made to create a
new folder with a name that is
already being used.
The layout name cannot be
changed. ‘Layout name’ already
exists.
An attempt was made to change the
name of a layout or layout sequence
to a name that is already being used.
9
Troubleshooting
メッセージ
Messages
Y
P
O
C
275
Messages List
Organize
Layouts &
Layout
Sequences
dialog
Sensor Event
Settings dialog
Sensor Settings
dialog
Viewer Settings
window
276
Messages
Cause
The folder name of the layout
cannot be changed. ‘Folder name’
already exists.
An attempt was made to change the
name of a folder to a name that is
already being used.
A layout with the same name is
already registered. Are you sure
you want to overwrite?
A layout or layout sequence with the
same name exists in the folder to
which the layout or layout sequence
is moved or copied.
A layout or folder with the same
name is already registered.
A folder with the same name as the
folder to which the layout or layout
sequence is moved or copied exists.
Or, a layout or layout sequence with
the same name exists in the folder to
which the folder is moved or copied.
It cannot be deleted because it is
used in the layout sequence.
An attempt was made to delete the
current layout sequence.
Specify the frame rate for the
sensor ‘sensor name’ recording
between ‘fps’ and ‘fps’.
An invalid recording frame rate was
entered.
The maximum value of the preevent sensor ‘sensor name’
recording is 30 seconds.
OK was pressed after configuring a
value exceeding 30 seconds for the
pre-event time value.
Do you want to save the changes in
the Viewer settings?
An attempt was made to close the
Viewing Screen without saving the
changes.
Y
P
O
C
Messages List
VK-64/VK-16 Recording Engine Logs
A list of messages shown in the Storage Server log file “nvr_re_log_<N>.txt” (<N> is either
0 or 1) is shown below. These messages are generated by the recording engine (Win32
service) that runs as part of a Storage Server.
Messages
Cause
9
Action
x frames out of y frames are
discarded because there were a
large number of frames that have
been requested to be written in
the disk. It is difficult for the
current settings of the recording
engine to process this amount of
tasks.
This message is recorded when
recording failure occurs when disk
is under a heavy load.
Reduce the system load using
the following methods.
1) Reduce the amount of data to
record (For example, lower
the resolution or frame rate).
2) Install an additional hard disk.
3) Implement an action such as
upgrading the CPU, or
increasing memory or existing
hard disk space.
Camera <camera>:
<x>/<y> frames
discarded due to busy
frame queue in last 1
minutes.
x frames out of y frames are
discarded because there were a
large number of unprocessed
frames. It may be that CPU or
hard disk drive is unable to
process data at the same speed
rate as the data reception.
This message is recorded when
recording failure occurs due to
motion detection or too many
event occurrences.
Reduce the system load using
the following methods.
1) Reduce the amount of data to
record (For example, lower
the resolution or frame rate).
2) Install an additional hard disk.
3) Implement an action such as
upgrading the CPU, or
increasing memory or existing
hard disk space.
Error resolving name for
POP server host: port
Error: <Winsock error
code>: <Error message>
When sending E-mail, the
recording engine could not
resolve the host name of the POP
server.
Refer to the corresponding
Winsock error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
Error connecting socket
for POP server host: port
Error: <Winsock error
code>: <Error message>
When sending E-mail, the
recording engine could not
connect to the POP server.
Refer to the corresponding
Winsock error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
POP connection error: 0
POP response: <pop
response>
When sending E-mail, an error
occurred in the first response sent
after connecting to the POP
server.
Refer to “A List of Error Codes
in Log File” (➝ P. 282).
POP user error: 0
POP response: <pop
response>
When sending E-mail, the user
name entered for the POP server
could not be authenticated.
Check the Storage Server
configuration to see if the
entered user name is correct.
Troubleshooting
Camera <camera>:
<x>/<y> frames
discarded due to busy
drive thread in last 1
minutes.
Y
P
O
C
277
Messages List
Messages
Cause
Action
POP password error: 0
POP response: <pop
response>
When sending E-mail, the
password entered for the POP
server could not be verified.
Check the Storage Server
configuration to see if the
entered password is correct.
Error resolving name for
SMTP server host: port
Error: <Winsock error
code>: <Error message>
When sending E-mail, the
recording engine could not
resolve the host name of the
SMTP server.
Refer to the corresponding
Winsock error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
Error connecting SMTP
to server host: port
Error: <Winsock error
code>: <Error message>
When sending E-mail, the
recording engine could not
connect to the SMTP server.
Refer to the corresponding
Winsock error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
Error sending E-mail.
SMTP server log follows:
<SMTP error message>
The recording engine could not
send E-mail due to a
communication error with the
SMTP server. Please refer to the
SMTP server log for details.
Refer to the corresponding
SMTP error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
NVR recording engine
stopping
This is always displayed when the
recording engine stops.
No action is required.
NVR Recording Engine
startup complete. Log
level = (<log level>)
This is always displayed when the
recording engine starts. The value
in “Log Level” indicates the log
level that is currently being
configured (The default is 1).
No action is required.
Unable to register a drive
for camera
<host>:<port>.
The storage destination drive
configured for this camera server
has been deleted.
Change the storage destination
drive of the camera server in
Configuration of the Viewer.
When the drive of the camera
server remains unchanged even
after this message is displayed,
the Viewer may become unable
to connect to the Storage
Server. When this occurs, stop
the Storage Server and open
the following file using notepad
or other application to delete the
drive configuration in which the
problem is occurring.
Error deleting old file
<windows error
message>.
A system error occurred when
deleting the file. This file is
probably being used by the
access engine or other
application. When this file is being
used for playing a recorded video,
this error is normal.
There is no necessary action.
Y
P
O
C
278
Messages List
Messages
Cause
Error writing frame for
camera <camera>:
<error message>
Cannot write data in the hard
disk.
Action
Check to ensure that the
specified drive is not configured
as read-only. In addition, ensure
that all directories in this path
are writable. When the drive
cannot be used due to the
above reason, configure it in a
way so that there are no camera
servers records on this drive.
* This is also recorded when the
date & time of the PC is reset to
past. When this occurs, this
error will no longer be recorded
when the date and time is reset
to the current date and time.
9
Troubleshooting
Y
P
O
C
ERROR(timeout): socket
type=(IMAGE/EVENT/
COMMAND),
cameraserver=(<host>:<
port>)
A timeout occurred while waiting
for a response from the specified
camera server. This normally
occurs when the camera server is
offline.
IMAGE == Get image process
EVENT == Get camera server
status process implemented by
GetNotice
COMMAND == Camera server
operation/configuration change
command process
Check to ensure that the
camera server is on and
connected to the network. If a
proxy server is configured using
the Storage Server
Configuration tool, check to
ensure that the proxy server is
running.
ERROR(connect): socket
type=(IMAGE/EVENT/
COMMAND),
cameraserver=(<host>:<
port>)
win32_error=(<Winsock
Winsock error
code>:<error message>)
An error occurred when
connecting to the specified
camera server.
IMAGE == Get image process
EVENT == Get camera server
status process implemented by
GetNotice
COMMAND == Camera server
operation/configuration change
command process
* same applies for “ERROR
(WSAConnect)”.
Refer to the corresponding
Winsock error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
ERROR(http): socket
type=(IMAGE/EVENT/
COMMAND),
cameraserver=(<host>:<
port>)
http_status=(<HTTP
error code>)
An HTTP error occurred when
connecting to the camera server.
IMAGE == Get image process
EVENT == Get camera server
status process implemented by
GetNotice
COMMAND == Camera server
operation/configuration change
command process
Refer to the corresponding
HTTP error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
279
Messages List
Messages
Cause
Action
Failed to write camera
configuration file
Cannot overwrite the camera
server configuration file. The
setting changes conducted after
the recording engine started
cannot be saved.
Check to ensure that you have
the write privilege for the
LocalSystem account in the VK64/VK-16 configuration
directory.
ERROR: Out of memory
-- please check
configuration of this PC
Failed to reserve memory in the
recording engine since the
system memory is under a heavy
load because unprocessed
frames continued to increase. An
application error will occur in a
few seconds and the Storage
Server functions will stop.
Reduce the system load using
the following methods.
1) Reduce the amount of data to
record (For example, lower
the resolution or frame rate).
2) Install an additional hard disk.
3) Implement an action such as
upgrading the CPU, or
increasing memory or existing
hard disk space.
Camera <camera>
Effective recording rate
(y%->z%)
The recording frame rate has
been changed from y% to z%
because the load of the recording
engine continued to increase
(decrease).
Even though there is no
necessary action, you can
reduce the system load using
the following methods if you
want to avoid frame rate
decrease events.
1) Reduce the amount of data to
record (For example, lower
the resolution or frame rate).
2) Install an additional hard disk.
3) Implement an action such as
upgrading the CPU, or
increasing memory or existing
hard disk space.
ERROR(http): socket
type=(Image),
cameraserver=(<host>:<
port>) http_status=400
An HTTP 400 error occurred
when getting the image.
It may be connected to SNC-P5,
DF40N in the MPEG mode.
Change it to the JPEG mode.
For other causes, refer to the
corresponding HTTP error code
in “A List of Error Codes in Log
File” (➝ P. 282).
Failed to start the
recording-mode stream
for Camera {IP address
of camera}.
Recording video stream requests
were made to the VB-C60 from
multiple Storage Servers.
Change the settings such that
the recording video stream
request is only made by one
unit.
Y
P
O
C
280
Messages List
Access Engine Log
A list of messages shown in the Storage Server log file “nvr_ae_log_<N>.txt” (<N> is either
0 or 1) is shown below. These messages are generated by the access engine (Win32
service) that runs as part of a Storage Server.
Messages
Cause
It indicates that startup of the
access engine has been
completed.
No action is required.
Troubleshooting
NVR Access Engine
startup complete. Log
level = <log level>
9
Action
Y
P
O
C
NVR Access Engine has
finished shutting down.
The access engine has been
stopped.
No action is required.
VK-64/VK-16 Viewer Logs
A list of messages shown in the VK Viewer log file “nvr_viewer_log_<N>.txt” (<N> is either
0 or 1) is shown below.
Messages
Cause
Action
CHttpVbSetngThread:
inet error=<wininet error
code>, winsock
error=<Winsock error
code>, count=
<Number of
occurrences>
A network error occurred while
communicating with the camera
server (This is recorded when a
problem occurs in configuration
protocol communications).
Refer to the corresponding
Winsock error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
vbc_HttpCommand:inet
error=<wininet error
code>, winsock
error=<Winsock error
code>, count=
<Number of
occurrences>
A network error occurred while
communicating with the camera
server (This is recorded when a
problem occurs in WV-HTTP
protocol communications).
Refer to the corresponding
Winsock error code in “A List of
Error Codes in Log File”
(➝ P. 282).
281
Messages List
Log Storage Destination
The Storage Server logs are stored in the following folder in the PC where the Storage
Server is installed.
<System drive>:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Canon
\WebView\NVR\logs\
The Apache logs used by the Storage Server are stored in the following Storage Server
installed folder.
<Storage server installed folder>: \websrvr\logs\
The Viewer logs are stored in the following folder in the PC where the Viewer is
installed.
Y
P
O
C
<System drive>:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Canon
\WebView\NVR\logs\
A List of Error Codes in Log File
●
A List of Winsock Error Codes
Codes
282
Error Messages
Description
10038
An operation was attempted on
something that is not a socket.
This may be recorded in Version 1.1,
however, there is no necessary action.
10048
Only one usage of each socket address
(protocol/network address/port) is
normally permitted.
All resources for communication are
being used. This frequently occurs when
a black screen problem occurs in Viewer
layout sequences.
10050
A socket operation encountered a dead
network.
This occurs when the PC recognizes that
the network is not available because the
closest router or Hub to the PC is
powered off. Normally, this cannot be
recognized, therefore it is rare that this
error is reported.
10051
A socket operation was attempted to an
unreachable network.
This occurs when another network
device recognizes that the network is not
available because the router or Hub is
powered off. Normally, this cannot be
recognized, therefore it is rare that this
error is reported.
Messages List
Codes
10054
Error Messages
An existing connection was forcibly
closed by the remote host.
Description
The connection is disconnected by the
camera server due to camera server
restart or other cause. This may occur
when the camera server is restarted
using the restart button on the
configuration page on the software-side.
However, this rarely occurs.
A connection attempt failed because
the connected party did not properly
respond after a period of time, or
established connection failed because
connected host has failed to respond.
A timeout occurred in the TCP
connection with the camera server (This
occurs when the camera server is down).
10061
No connection could be made because
the target machine actively refused it.
The camera server rejected the TCP
connection (This occurs when the port
number specification is incorrect or other
cause).
10064
A socket operation failed because the
destination host was down.
This is recorded when the camera server
is down (Normally, 10060 occurs).
10065
A socket operation was attempted to an
unreachable host.
There are no routes to connect to the
camera server (This may also occur
when there is a failure in the network
cable connected to the PC or HUB).
10091
WSAStartup cannot function at this
time because the underlying system it
uses to provide network services is
currently unavailable.
There is a failure on the PC network
board.
11001
No such host is known.
The host name in DNS could not be
resolved.
11004
The requested name is valid, but no
data of the requested type was found.
The host name in DNS could not be
resolved (11004 may occur instead of
11001 in 2003).
Troubleshooting
10060
9
Y
P
O
C
283
Messages List
●
A List of SMTP Error Codes
Codes
284
Error Messages
Description
421
<domain> Service not available, closing
transmission channel
The communication is terminated
because the mail server stopped.
450
Requested mail action not taken:
mailbox unavailable
The requested mail process was not
executed because the mailbox is not
available.
451
Requested action aborted: local error in
processing
The requested execution was canceled
because an error occurred in the mail
server.
502
Command not implemented
The mail server does not support the
command that was sent.
550
Requested action not taken: mailbox
unavailable
The request was not executed because
the mailbox is not available.
Y
P
O
C
Messages List
●
A List of HTTP Error Codes
Codes
400
Error Messages
Bad Request
Description
When more than 4 Storage Servers are
connected when a Sony camera is used.
This is recorded when the operation
mode of the camera server is mpeg4.
9
Troubleshooting
The user authentication or password for
connecting to the camera server is
incorrect.
401
Unauthorized
403
Forbidden
This is recorded when the connection
cannot be established due to the IP
address restriction on the camera server
side (It may also be returned by the
proxy server).
500
Internal Server Error
This occurs when the webview server is
not running even when the HTTP server
is running. This may also be recorded
even during normal operation if the
camera server is restarted.
502
Bad Gateway
This is recorded when the proxy server
returned an HTTP 502 error (which
occurs when the proxy server receives
an error from the upper proxy).
503
Service Unavailable
This occurs when the webview server is
not running even when the HTTP server
is running.
This is recorded when the proxy server
returned an HTTP 503 error (which
occurs when the proxy server failed to
connect to the camera server).
504
Gateway Time-out
This is recorded when the proxy server
returned an HTTP 504 error (which
occurs when the proxy server could not
receive a reply from the upper proxy).
Y
P
O
C
285
Messages List
●
A List of wininet Error Codes
Codes
Error Messages
12002
The request has timed out.
A request timeout occurred. It indicates
that connection or request transmission
failed.
12005
The URL is invalid.
The URL is incorrect (Normally, this does
not occur, however, it may occur when
an attempt is made to connect to an
unsupported camera server).
12007
The server name could not be resolved.
The host name could not be resolved
(This error indicates when a host name
that is not registered in DNS is specified
or that a problem occurred in
communication with DNS).
12017
The operation was canceled, usually
because the handle on which the
request was operating was closed
before the operation completed.
The communication was canceled (This
error is not a problem, it may be
recording during normal operation).
12029
The attempt to connect to the server
failed.
The connection to the camera server
failed (Normally 12002 is recorded).
12030
The connection with the server has
been terminated.
The connection to the camera server has
been disconnected (The disconnect
process itself is recorded when it is
executed normally).
12031
The connection with the server has
been reset.
The connection to the camera server has
been disconnected forcibly.
●
Y
P
O
C
A List of POP Error Codes
Error Messages
286
Description
Description
ERR never heard of mailbox name
The mail address is incorrect.
ERR invalid password
The password is incorrect.
ERR unable to lock maildrop
The mailbox cannot be used (Another
program is already using it).
Messages List
VK Event Information
Displayed Messages
Starting or stopping the recording engine
Start (on)/Stop (off)
Recording engine {status}
User logon
on
User {user name} logon
Sensor
on/off
The sensor {sensor name} is {status}.
Motion detection
9
Troubleshooting
Event type
Y
P
O
C
on/off
The motion detection is {status}.
Starting or stopping recording
Start (on)/Stop (off)
Stop recording
or
Start recording. Pre-event
Recording (configured duration)
(sec.)
Starting or stopping the recording settings
Create (on)/Close (off)
Recording setting {number} {status}
Manual recording and custom trigger
Start (on)/Stop (off)
For manual recording:
The user {user name} set the manual recording to
{status}.
For custom recording:
(Custom text provided by the triggered client).
Disk space warning
Warning (on)/recovered (off)
{Drive} Low disk space: {status}
Starting or stopping deleting due to low
disk space
Start (on)/Stop (off)
Low disk space {drive}
Delete files in the drive: {status}
Starting or stopping recording due to low
disk space
Start (on)/Stop (off)
Low disk space {drive}
Hold recording to the drive: {status}
Connection error to the camera server
Error (on)/recovered (off)
Connect to the host ({camera server
address}:{port}): {status}
Continuing recording
Continuing recording
287
Messages List
Event type
Displayed Messages
Changing the recording frame rate
Valid recording rate ({recording rate before change}
➝ {recording rate after change} %)
“Recording rate” is the ratio of received images that
are actually being recorded. If the rate is 100%, then
all received images are recorded. If 50%, 1 frame
per 2 frames is recorded.
Error Number: Error Description
Cause
Y
P
O
C
10048:
The socket cannot be used.
A socket for the communication could not be
generated because a large number of TCP
connections are used in the PC.
10050:
The network is down.
The network is down (when a failure occurs in a
HUB or router located near the PC).
10051:
The network cannot be reached.
A failure occurred in a HUB or router near the
camera server.
10054:
Forcibly disconnected by the
camera server.
The TCP connection is disconnected because the
camera server was restarted or another cause.
10060:
Connection timeout
A timeout occurred in the TCP connection with the
camera server (This occurs when the camera server
is down).
10061:
The connection to the camera
server was rejected.
The camera server rejected the TCP connection
(This occurs when the port number specification is
incorrect or another cause).
10064:
The camera server is down.
The camera server is down (Normally, 10060
occurs).
10065:
The camera server cannot be
reached.
There are no routes to connect to the camera server
(This may also occur when there is a failure in the
network cable connected to the PC or HUB).
10091:
Failure on the network board
There is a failure on the PC network board.
11001:
The host name is unknown.
The host name in DNS could not be resolved.
11004:
The host name is unknown.
The host name in DNS could not be resolved (11004
may occur instead of 11001 in 2003).
Empty character string
288
Other Winsock Errors
Messages List
Cause
HT401:
Account restriction
The user authentication or password for connecting
to the camera server is incorrect. Check to ensure
that it is not an on/off event.
HT403:
IP address restriction
Cannot connect due to the IP address restriction on
the camera server side.
HT502:
Bad Gateway 502
The proxy server returns an HTTP 502 error (which
occurs when the proxy server receives an error from
the upper proxy).
HT503:
Service unavailable 503
The proxy server returned an HTTP 503 error (which
occurs when the proxy server failed to connect to
the camera server).
HT504:
Gateway Timeout 504
The proxy server returned an HTTP 504 error (which
occurs when the proxy server could not receive a
reply from the upper proxy).
9
Troubleshooting
Error Number: Error Description
Y
P
O
C
WV407: Recording-mode streams
unavailable
The following settings were configured for the
stream for recording.
a) JPEG recording at over 10fps
b) MEPG-4 recording
c) Image upload function is activated on VB-C60
WV408: Conflict of recording-mode
streams
While connecting using the stream for recording,
another request for the recording stream was
received.
289
Y
P
O
C
290
Appendix
Y
P
O
C
Camera Server Control
The following figure shows the order of priority for Camera Server control.
Strong
Application
Panorama Creation Tool
WebView Admin Viewer/NC Viewer (Administrator)/VB-C60 Admin Viewer
Motion Detection Settings Tool (VB-C60/VB-C50i Series VB Administration Tool)
VB-C60 Admin Viewer (Registered User)
VK-64/VK-16 Storage Server (when a preset is specified for sensor recording)
Y
P
O
C
Motion Detection Module (VB-C60/VB-C50 Series)
Operating the Camera Server in the VK-64/VK-16 settings window
VK-64/VK-16 Viewer (when the Camera Server is operated in the Viewer)
VK-64/VK-16 Storage Server (when a recording position is specified) VK Preset
Tour
VB-C60 Viewer (Guest User), NC Viewer (Authorized User), Viewer for PC/Viewer
for Java (VB-C50i Series)
Weak
VB-C60, VB-C50 Preset Tour
When a recording position is specified in VK-64/VK-16, you cannot operate the camera
server using VB-C60 Viewer (Guest User), NC Viewer, Viewer for PC, or Viewer for
Java.
292
Hard Disk
Lifetime of Hard Disk
A hard disk is a storage device that works physically, and has a limited lifetime. It is a kind
of consumables. It is said that the average lifetime of a RAID system composed of SCSI
hard disks is three years. However, this lifetime is considered to be true for standard file
servers or business servers. The disk failure rate of VK-64/VK-16 systems is higher than
that of general file servers. It is reasonable to assume that the lifetime of hard disks in a
VK-64/VK-16 system is about half of that of a standard file server (one and a half years).
Therefore, when you build a VK-64/VK-16 system, it is advisable to provide a hot-spare
(spare hard disks that are active) for RAID configuration.
10
Y
P
O
C
Appendix
RAID Reconfiguration
If one of hard disks in RAID1 and RAID5 systems breaks down, you can restore the
system by replacing the broken hard disk before other disks break.
Restoring the data stored on the broken hard disk after replacement is referred to as
rebuilding.
During RAID rebuilding, a recording error may occur because disk system performance
deteriorates.
●
RAID Rebuilding Time
When a failure occurs in a hard disk in a RAID system and you want to replace it with a
hot-spare or new one, the rebuilding time is to be considered as follows:
Rebuilding takes about one minute per 1GB when no I/O is performed in a SCSI RAID
card.
When a RAID system is composed of four SCSI hard disks of 300GB each, the total
disk size of the hard disks is 1200GB. To rebuild this system, 1200 minutes (20 hours)
are required on the condition that there no I/O is performed.
If rebuilding takes 20 hours when there is no I/O, the rebuilding time for a VK-64/VK-16
system where I/O is continuously performed can be assumed to be about 20 x 2 hours.
Thus, when you perform rebuilding without stopping recording, it takes about 40 hours.
There is no problem if rebuilding only takes a long time. However, the other hard disks
may break down one after another during such rebuilding. If another hard disk breaks
down during rebuilding, all of the stored data will be lost. Therefore, it is preferable to
reduce rebuilding time as far as possible.
293
Hard Disk
●
Configuration for Reducing Rebuilding Time
As described in the preceding section, it is important to shorten rebuilding time as far as
possible. You can reduce rebuilding time by configuring hard disks as follows:
For example, when you create two configurations including three 146GB hard disks and a
hot- spare, instead of creating one configuration (900GB) including three 300GB hard disks
and a hot-spare, rebuilding requires less time and risks are reduced.
●
Measures to be Taken When Rebuilding
Y
P
O
C
To reduce the load on the PC during rebuilding and to shorten the rebuilding time, it is also
recommended to implement the following measures:
Stop the Storage Server program before rebuilding.
Temporarily reduce the recording frame rate during rebuilding.
●
Notes on Consistency Check of RAID Configuration Information
For stable operation of hard disks, you need to regularly perform consistency check of
RAID configuration information. This is especially effective for preventing data
inconsistency when rebuilding is performed. However, as with rebuilding, the consistency
check of RAID configuration information imposes a burden on the PC for a long period of
time.
In a consistency check of RAID configuration information, measures such as configuring
hard disks in the same way as in rebuilding and reducing the load on the PC, are also
important. Refer to “Measures to be Taken When Rebuilding”.
294
How To Check Software Version
Follow the procedure below to check the version of the software.
Storage Server Configuration tool
1. Open the Storage Server Configuration dialog.
2. Right-click the title bar of the dialog and select About Storage Server Configuration.
3. Check the software version in the dialog displayed.
Y
P
O
C
Appendix
VK Viewer
10
1. Launch the VK Viewer.
2. Select About VK Viewer from the Help menu.
3. Check the software version in the dialog displayed.
295
Functional Limitations on MPEG-4
VB-C60 supports MPEG-4 format video in addition to JPEG format video.
However, this are several functional limitations as follows.
●
Live Viewing
The following video window settings become disabled, and the frame rate setting of the
camera takes effect.
• Max. Live Frame Rate
• AutoAdjust Frame Rate
Synchronization of audio and video is not guaranteed.
Y
P
O
C
A message is displayed if you attempt to display 21 or more MPEG-4 video windows.
●
Video Recording
The recording frame rate cannot be set for the following recording modes.
• Constant recording
• Motion detection recording
• Sensor recording
The Reduce recording frame rate when disk is under high load setting in the Storage
Server Settings Tool becomes disabled.
Record Now only supports the JPEG format, and cannot record in MPEG-4 format.
●
Playback
Although the following controls can be used when playing back video recorded in
MPEG-4 format, the rewind and nudge back controls do not function.
• Specify playback time using the timeline
• Begin playback from the live event viewing window and event search window
• Pause, fast forward, nudge forward, previous event, next event
If a schedule that had previously been recording in MPEG-4 format is switched to
recording in JPEG format, when rewind playback from the JPEG format time range
enters the MPEG-4 time range, although the rewind playback continues, the video is not
displayed and an error stating “No Recorded Video.” is displayed.
If you attempt to save a time range of recorded video that spans multiple recording
schedules, only the video recorded in the oldest schedule is saved.
The MPEG-4 format video recorded using this software cannot be played back in other
software.
296
Index
A
Add Camera Server...............................93
Add Camera Server dialog ....................93
Add Schedule Item dialog ...................111
Additional Options ...................................117
Continuous recording ..............................123
Exposure Compensation. ................114, 200
External Outputs Setting .........................117
Motion Detection Recording ..............35, 124
Night Mode ..............................................116
Preset Camera Angle ..............................114
Resolution .........................................31, 117
Sensor Event Recording .................113, 131
Cameras for Viewing ...........................186
Camera Thumbnails ................................186
Location, Zone drop-down menu.............187
Locations and Zones ...............................187
Camera Server Control .......................292
Communication Mechanism ..................20
Configuration and Preferences screen..81
Configuration Files ..............................233
Continuous Recording.........................123
10
D
Y
P
O
C
B
Backup ................................................227
Backup Device ........................................230
Backup for Archiving ...............................235
Backup for Data Protection .............234, 240
Backup Tool ............................................230
Configuration files....................................233
Event Data.......................................231, 236
Examples.................................................240
Restoration ..............................................237
Temporary File ........................................231
Video Data........................................231 234
Appendix
Audio Data...........................................231
Audio Panel .........................................203
Audio Recording..................................113
Daylight Savings..................................210
Disk Space Management ......................64
Calculation Example..................................67
Limit Level .................................................65
Low Disk Space Warning Level...........64, 66
Threshold Level.........................................65
E
Event .....................................................53
Event Notification ......................................54
Priority Level..............................................54
Event Data...........................................231
Extract Video to save ..........................210
F
Find Camera Servers ............................91
Firmware ...............................................22
Upgrade.....................................................22
Before Starting Operations....................12
Frame Size ......................................33, 34
C
G
Camera Control Panel.........................195
Get Camera Control ....................192, 194
Exposure Control.....................................196
Camera Server ......................................91
Change Settings......................................119
Delete ......................................................102
Edit ..........................................................100
Register .....................................................91
Search .......................................................91
H
Hard Disk.......................................31, 293
Lifetime....................................................293
RAID Reconfiguration..............................293
How To Check Software Version .......295
297
Index
I
Installation .............................................43
Preparation and Precaution.......................48
Reinstalling..............................................247
Restore Previous Version........................248
Upgrade from Previous Version ................47
L
Layouts................................................172
Optional Layout Menu .............................172
Personal Layouts.....................................172
Shared Layouts .......................................172
Operational Guideline..........................223
Event Recording......................................225
Live-View Frame Rate Adjustment..........223
Recording Frame Rate Adjustment .........224
Operation and Management................219
P
Pan, Tilt, Zoom ....................................194
Preparation Flow ...................................16
Preset Tour..........................................138
Y
P
O
C
Layout Grids ........................................179
Custom Grid ............................................184
Grid..........................................................179
License ..................................................18
Location and Zone.................................84
Add ............................................................86
Delete ........................................................87
Edit ............................................................87
Logs.....................................................277
A List of Error Codes ...............................282
Storage Destination.................................282
M
Manual Recording ...............................208
Master Storage Server ..........................30
Message List .......................................260
Motion Detection Recording ................124
Optimization ............................................226
MPEG-4...............................................296
N
Normal Schedule.................................109
O
Operating Environment .........................22
Notes .........................................................24
Storage Server ..........................................23
Supported Camera Servers.......................22
System Environment .................................23
298
R
Recording Schedule ............................104
Batch-Setting...........................................122
Normal Schedule.....................................109
Special Day Schedule .....................107, 142
Recording Setting Summary ...............148
Summary Information of a Recording .....148
Summary Information of Storage Server.150
Restoration Procedure ........................237
S
Special Day Schedule .........................142
Add ..........................................................143
Add a Day................................................145
Delete ......................................................144
Delete a Day............................................146
Edit ..........................................................144
Search Events .....................................214
Criteria for Searching ..............................215
Date and Time Range .............................215
Event Search...........................................214
Live Event Log list ...................................213
View retrieved recorded video.................216
Sensor Event Recording .....................131
Set Preset Camera Angle....................114
Shade Controll.............................197, 202
Snapshot .............................................209
Special Day Recording........................142
Still Frame ...........................................171
Storage and Camera Server Summary
Windows..........................................82, 88
Index
Storage Server ................................49, 88
Add ............................................................88
Delete ........................................................90
Edit ............................................................89
Health Check...........................................221
How to Start-Up.........................................51
Performance..............................................36
Storage Server Configuration tool ...........295
U
Upgrade.........................................47, 245
Camera Firmware....................................249
from Previous Versions .....................47, 245
User Management.................................72
Administrator .............................................72
User Authentication ...................................74
Storage Server Configuration dialog .....51
Event Notification Tab .........................54, 70
Events Tab ..........................................53, 68
Settings Tab ........................................52, 56
User Management Tab........................55, 72
V
10
Video Data...................................231, 234
Video Window .............................180, 199
Hard Disk Capacity....................................31
Network Bandwidth ...................................38
Server Sizing .............................................31
System Configuration ................................28
Video Data Volume ...................................31
Viewer Sizing.............................................37
When using multiple Storage Servers .......30
When using multiple Storage Servers and
Viewers......................................................29
When using Viewer alone..........................30
System Operation Overview..................18
T
Task Areas ..........................................185
Timeline...............................................204
Capture Still Frame .................................209
Extract Video ...........................................210
Jump to Time...........................................207
Playback controls ....................................206
Playhead .........................................204, 206
Record Now.............................................208
Return to Live ..........................................211
Shoot a Snapshot....................................209
Zoom In / Out ..........................................209
Troubleshooting...................................251
Appendix
Y
P
O
C
Supported Camera Servers...................22
System Configuration ............................20
System Design Concept........................28
Audio Panel .............................................203
Camera Thumbnail..................................186
Change Size............................................199
Create, scale and move ..........................188
Enable Exposure Compensation.............200
External Device Output ...........................117
Night mode ..............................................134
Select Multiple Video Windows ...............191
Smart Shade Control...............................197
Video Window States ..............................192
Viewer Shade Control .............................202
Viewer ...................................................77
How to Launch ..........................................77
Operation Flow ........................................156
Viewer Setting .....................................166
Administorator Tab ..................................167
Audio Transmission Setting.....................170
Focus Operation Setting..........................170
Launch Storage Server by Specifying
the IP address ...................................79, 160
Launch by Connecting to the
Localhost ...........................................78, 159
Proxy Server Setting ...............................170
Select Master Storage Server .................167
Set Event Notifications ............................168
Set Event Popups....................................167
Set layout of the Viewing Screen ............167
Start-up Option ........................................163
Superimpose Date and Time...................171
Viewer Only Mode .............................30, 161
299
Index
Viewer Shade Comtrol ........................202
VK Event Information ..........................287
VK Events............................................221
VK Viewer..............................................77
VK-Lite...................................................39
Y
P
O
C
300
Y
P
O
C
301
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 1468501, Japan
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, P.O. Box 2262, 1185 XB
Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON U.S.A.,INC.
One Canon Plaza Lake Success, NY 11042-1198
USA
CANON EUROPE LTD.
6 Roundwood Avenue, Stockley Park, Uxbridge
Middlesex, UB11 1JA, United Kingdom
If you have any questions, call the Canon
U.S.A. Information Center toll-free at 1-800828-4040 (U.S.A. only)
CANON COMMUNICATION & IMAGE FRANCE
12 Rue De L'lndustrie, 92414 Corbevoie, Cedex,
Fance
CANON CANADA INC. NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7
CANON (UK) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey RH2 8BF, United
Kingdom
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY
2828, 16th Street, N.E, Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7
CANON CANADA INC. MONTRÉAL
8801 Trans Canada Hwy, St. Laurent Quebec H4S
1Z6
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A 10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
If you have any questions, call the CANON
CANADA Customer Information Centre
tollfree at 1-800-OK-CANON (652-2666)
(Canada only)
CANON (Schweiz) A.G.
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland
Y
P
O
C
CANON MEXICANA, S. DE R.L.DE C.V.
Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho, No. 138 PB, Pisos
15, 16 y 17
Col Lomas de Chapultepec C.P. 11000 Mexico, D.F.
México
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01, Keppel Bay Tower
Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,
Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY.LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W.
2113, Australia
PUB. YT1-1393-000
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 San Donato M. se-20097 (MI), Italy
CANON BELGIUM N.V./S.A
Bessenveldstraat 7, 1831 Diegem, Belgium
CANON GmbH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Wien, Austria
CANON ESPAÑA,S.A.
Avda. de Europa, 6 Alcobendas, 28108 Madrid, Spain
CANON SVENSKA AB
Gustav III:s, Boulevard 26, 169 88 Solna, Sweden
CANON NORGE A/S
Hallagerbakken 110, P.O. Box 33, Holmlia, N-1201
Oslo, Norway
CANON OY
Huopalahdentie 24, P.O. Box 1, FIN-00351 Helsinki,
Finland
CANON DANMARK A/S
Knud Hoejgaards Vej 1, DK-2860, Soeborg, Denmark
© CANON INC.2008
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement